Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

Moneris iWL220

Short-Range Mobile

OPERATING MANUAL

Software Version 2.16

Documentation Date: November 18, 2013

® MONERIS, MONERIS & Design, MONERIS SOLUTIONS & Design, and MERCHANT DIRECT are registered trade-marks of Moneris Solutions Corporation. All other marks or registered trade-marks are the property of their respective owners.

© 2013 Moneris Solutions Corporation, 3300 Bloor Street West, Toronto, Ontario, M8X 2X2.

All Rights Reserved. This manual shall not wholly or in part, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, including photocopying, be reproduced or transmitted without the authorized consent of Moneris Solutions

Corporation.

This manual is for informational purposes only. Neither Moneris Solutions Corporation (“Moneris”) nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or punitive damages arising out of use of any of the information contained in this manual.

Neither Moneris or any of its affiliates nor any of our or their respective licensors, licensees, service providers or suppliers warrant or make any representation regarding the use or the results of the use of the information, content and materials contained in this manual in terms of their correctness, accuracy, reliability or otherwise.

Your Gift card processing is governed by your Moneris Gift Program Agreement with Moneris.

Your Loyalty card processing is governed by your Moneris Loyalty Program Agreement with Moneris.

Your credit and/or debit card processing is separately governed by the Terms and Conditions of your Moneris VISA

Merchant Agreement, your Moneris MasterCard Merchant Agreement, your Moneris Discover Merchant Agreement and/or your Moneris INTERAC Merchant and Terminal Agreement (collectively the “Merchant Agreements”), as applicable with Moneris.

It is the merchant’s responsibility to ensure that proper card processing procedures are followed at all times. Please refer to your Merchant manuals and the Terms and Conditions of your Merchant Agreement(s) for details. The

Moneris Merchant Operating Manual is available for free download at moneris.com/manuals .

Table of Contents

1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... 1

1.1

What's New in 2.16 ..........................................................................................................................................1

1.2

Getting Started.................................................................................................................................................1

1.3

Learning About the Terminal.........................................................................................................................1

1.4

Caring for your Moneris Hardware...............................................................................................................2

1.4.1

Caring for the Terminal .............................................................................................................................2

1.4.2

Caring for the Base ....................................................................................................................................2

2 FEATURES AND PROCEDURES ............................................................................ 3

2.1

Standard Features ...........................................................................................................................................3

2.1.1

Backlight....................................................................................................................................................3

2.1.2

Card Number Masking...............................................................................................................................3

2.1.3

Communications Status .............................................................................................................................4

2.1.4

The Menu Feature......................................................................................................................................6

2.1.5

Admin Codes ...........................................................................................................................................14

2.1.6

Stored Transactions .................................................................................................................................18

2.1.7

Training Mode .........................................................................................................................................18

2.1.8

Wireless Communication on the iWL220................................................................................................18

2.1.9

Stand-by Mode.........................................................................................................................................18

2.2

Optional Features ..........................................................................................................................................18

2.2.1

Balanced Prompt......................................................................................................................................19

2.2.2

Cashback..................................................................................................................................................19

2.2.3

Cheque Authorization ..............................................................................................................................20

2.2.4

Using a Chip Card ...................................................................................................................................20

2.2.5

Contactless Reader...................................................................................................................................21

2.2.6

Clerk Subtotalling ....................................................................................................................................23

2.2.7

Clerk IDs..................................................................................................................................................23

2.2.8

Corporate Cards .......................................................................................................................................23

2.2.9

Credit-Only Processing............................................................................................................................23

2.2.10

Dial Backup for Ethernet Communication...............................................................................................24

2.2.11

Declined Beep..........................................................................................................................................24

2.2.12

Invoice Number Prompt...........................................................................................................................24

2.2.13

Gift/Loyalty Programs .............................................................................................................................24

2.2.14

Keystroke Beep........................................................................................................................................25

2.2.15

MOTO Transactions ................................................................................................................................25

2.2.16

Manual Card Entry ..................................................................................................................................25

2.2.17

Multi-Terminal Reporting........................................................................................................................25

2.2.18

Personalized Message on Receipts ..........................................................................................................26

2.2.19

Pre-Authorization as the Default Transaction..........................................................................................26

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual i

Table of Contents

2.2.20

Private Label Cards..................................................................................................................................26

2.2.21

The Air Miles Rewards Program .............................................................................................................26

2.2.22

Signatureless Transactions: Credit Cards ................................................................................................27

2.2.23

Terminal Names.......................................................................................................................................28

2.2.24

Tip Entry by Cardholder ..........................................................................................................................28

2.2.25

Tip Line on Pre-Authorization Receipts ..................................................................................................29

2.2.26

Tip Percentage .........................................................................................................................................29

2.2.27

Tip Reporting...........................................................................................................................................29

2.3

Standard Procedures .....................................................................................................................................29

2.3.1

Powering On the iWL220 ........................................................................................................................30

2.3.2

Powering Off the iWL220 .......................................................................................................................30

2.3.3

Charging the Battery................................................................................................................................30

2.3.4

Battery Charging......................................................................................................................................31

2.3.5

Base Power Status....................................................................................................................................31

2.3.6

Battery Charge Level ...............................................................................................................................31

2.3.7

Battery Management Tips........................................................................................................................32

2.3.8

Bilingual Displays and Receipts ..............................................................................................................32

2.3.9

Changing the Display Language..............................................................................................................32

2.3.10

Taking a Manual Imprint of a Card .........................................................................................................33

2.3.11

Cancelling a Transaction .........................................................................................................................34

2.3.12

Cancelling a Report .................................................................................................................................34

2.3.13

Reprinting a Receipt or Report ................................................................................................................34

2.3.14

The Reprint Function ...............................................................................................................................35

2.3.15

Disputed Debit Transactions....................................................................................................................35

2.3.16

PAN Fraud Check....................................................................................................................................36

2.3.17

Code 10 Authorization.............................................................................................................................36

2.3.18

Terminal Security ....................................................................................................................................36

2.3.19

POS Admin Card .....................................................................................................................................37

2.3.20

Entering Alphabetic Characters and Punctuation ....................................................................................38

2.3.21

Entering the Clerk ID...............................................................................................................................38

2.3.22

Entering the Invoice Number...................................................................................................................39

2.3.23

Entering Original Amount and Tip ..........................................................................................................39

2.3.24

Deleting a Pre-Auth from the Pre-Authorization Advice List .................................................................40

2.3.25

Entering the Promo Code.........................................................................................................................40

2.3.26

Finding the Original Sequence Number...................................................................................................40

2.3.27

Transaction with MOTO Enabled............................................................................................................41

2.3.28

Enter Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card ..................................................................41

2.3.29

Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit ...........................................................................................................42

3 THE MONERIS IWL220 SHORT-RANGE MOBILE HARDWARE ......................... 47

3.1

Setting Up the Hardware ..............................................................................................................................48

3.2

Selecting the Base Location...........................................................................................................................48

3.2.1

Base Location Considerations .................................................................................................................48

3.2.2

Ensure a base is placed: ...........................................................................................................................48

3.2.3

Protect a base from: .................................................................................................................................49

3.2.4

Do not place a base near: .........................................................................................................................49

3.2.5

Sample Floorplans ...................................................................................................................................49

3.2.6

Center-Obstruction Floor Plan.................................................................................................................49

3.2.7

Indoor/Outdoor Floor plan.......................................................................................................................50

3.2.8

L-Shaped Floor plan ................................................................................................................................50

3.2.9

Multi-Level Floor plan.............................................................................................................................50

3.2.10

Testing the Wireless Communications ....................................................................................................51

ii Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

Table of Contents

3.3

Registering the Terminal to a Base ..............................................................................................................51

3.3.1

Communications Base ID ........................................................................................................................52

3.3.2

Converting the Communications Base Mode ..........................................................................................52

3.3.3

Establishing a Connection to the Communications Base.........................................................................52

3.4

The Terminal..................................................................................................................................................54

3.5

The Integrated Printer ..................................................................................................................................54

3.6

The Display.....................................................................................................................................................56

3.6.1

The READY Screen ................................................................................................................................56

3.6.2

The TRAINING Screen ...........................................................................................................................56

3.6.3

The Credit-Only READY Screen ............................................................................................................57

3.6.4

The Pre-Auth READY Screen .................................................................................................................57

3.7

The Terminal Keypad ...................................................................................................................................58

3.8

The Magnetic Stripe Reader.........................................................................................................................59

3.9

The Chip Card Reader on the Terminal......................................................................................................59

3.10

The Contactless Reader on the Terminal ....................................................................................................60

3.11

Docking the Terminal on a Base...................................................................................................................60

3.12

The Communications Base............................................................................................................................61

3.12.1

The Ports on the Communications Base ..................................................................................................61

3.12.2

Powering on the Communications base ...................................................................................................61

3.13

The Charge-Only Base ..................................................................................................................................62

3.13.1

Ports on the Charge-Only Base................................................................................................................62

3.13.2

Powering on the Charge-Only Base.........................................................................................................62

3.14

The Cables ......................................................................................................................................................63

3.14.1

The Power Cable......................................................................................................................................63

3.14.2

Installing the Power Cable .......................................................................................................................63

3.14.3

Dial Communication Cable .....................................................................................................................63

3.14.4

Ethernet Communication Cable...............................................................................................................64

4 CONFIGURING YOUR TERMINAL ........................................................................ 65

4.1

Configuring Communications ......................................................................................................................65

4.1.1

Configuring Dial Communication ...........................................................................................................66

4.1.2

Dial Backup for Ethernet Communication...............................................................................................68

4.1.3

Configuring Ethernet Communications ...................................................................................................68

4.1.4

Configuring the Host Setup Parameters...................................................................................................76

4.2

Configuring the Receipt Format ..................................................................................................................77

4.2.1

Select number of receipts printed for a transaction..................................................................................79

4.2.2

Select and edit the trailer message for cardholder receipts ......................................................................80

4.2.3

Reset the trailer message to the original text ...........................................................................................81

4.2.4

Trailer Message Options..........................................................................................................................81

4.3

Disabling the Backlight .................................................................................................................................83

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual iii

Table of Contents

4.4

Configuring Corporate (Purchasing) Cards................................................................................................83

4.5

Configuring Private Label ............................................................................................................................84

4.6

Configuring General Parameters .................................................................................................................84

4.7

Configuring Tip Entry - Debit/Credit..........................................................................................................90

4.7.1

Tip Prompt Formats .................................................................................................................................91

4.8

Configuring Clerk Subtotals.........................................................................................................................92

4.8.1

Allow Clerks to Zero Totals ....................................................................................................................92

4.8.2

Identify Clerk ID Entry Method ..............................................................................................................93

4.8.3

Adding Clerk IDs (including the Default Clerk ID) ................................................................................93

4.8.4

Removing Clerk IDs ................................................................................................................................94

4.8.5

Enabling Clerk Subtotalling.....................................................................................................................95

4.8.6

Enabling the Clerk ID Prompt .................................................................................................................95

4.8.7

Enabling the Default Clerk ID .................................................................................................................96

4.8.8

Identifying the Clerk ID Location............................................................................................................96

4.9

Configuring Multi-terminal Reporting........................................................................................................96

4.9.1

Enabling Multi-Terminal Reporting ........................................................................................................96

4.9.2

Disabling Multi-terminal Reporting ........................................................................................................97

4.9.3

Changing the Terminal Name..................................................................................................................97

4.9.4

Deleting the Terminal Name....................................................................................................................98

4.10

Configuring Cheque Authorization..............................................................................................................98

4.11

Initialization ...................................................................................................................................................99

4.11.1

First Initialization.....................................................................................................................................99

4.11.2

Re-initialization .......................................................................................................................................99

4.12

Restore Factory Defaults.............................................................................................................................100

4.13

Remote Code Download ..............................................................................................................................100

5 FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS.............................................................................. 101

5.1

Payment Types .............................................................................................................................................101

5.1.1

Credit Transactions ................................................................................................................................101

5.1.2

Debit Transactions .................................................................................................................................102

5.2

Card Programs ............................................................................................................................................102

5.2.1

Card Entry at the POS............................................................................................................................102

5.3

Transaction Flows........................................................................................................................................103

5.4

Transaction Guidelines ...............................................................................................................................103

5.5

Credit and Debit Transactions ...................................................................................................................104

5.5.1

Purchase.................................................................................................................................................104

5.5.2

Purchase-Void........................................................................................................................................105

5.5.3

Refund ...................................................................................................................................................107

5.5.4

Refund-Void ..........................................................................................................................................109

5.5.5

Pre-Authorizations .................................................................................................................................111

iv Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

Table of Contents

5.5.6

Pre-Auth Completion (Advice)..............................................................................................................111

5.5.7

Pre-Authorizations and Completions (Advices) ....................................................................................111

5.5.8

Manually Processing Transactions ........................................................................................................118

5.5.9

Manually Processing Transactions UNDER Floor Limit ......................................................................118

5.5.10

Manually Processing Transactions OVER Floor Limit .........................................................................118

5.5.11

Private Label Transactions.....................................................................................................................119

5.6

Cheque Authorization Transactions ..........................................................................................................121

5.6.1

Cheque Authorization ............................................................................................................................121

5.6.2

Cheque Authorization with a Credit Card..............................................................................................121

5.6.3

Cheque Authorization with a Driver's Licence ......................................................................................122

5.6.4

Province or State Code ..........................................................................................................................123

5.7

Receipt Processing .......................................................................................................................................123

6 THE MONERIS GIFT AND LOYALTY PROGRAMS............................................ 125

6.1

Gift/Loyalty Programs ................................................................................................................................125

6.2

The Moneris Gift Card Program ...............................................................................................................125

6.2.1

Configuring Tip Entry for Gift ..............................................................................................................126

6.2.2

Configuring the Tip Percentage for Gift ................................................................................................126

6.2.3

Gift Card Transactions...........................................................................................................................127

6.3

The Moneris Loyalty Program ...................................................................................................................131

6.3.1

Loyalty Card Transactions.....................................................................................................................131

6.3.2

Loyalty Reports .....................................................................................................................................131

6.3.3

Loyalty Transactions..............................................................................................................................132

6.4

Gift/Loyalty Procedures ..............................................................................................................................137

6.4.1

Reprinting Gift/Loyalty Receipts...........................................................................................................137

6.4.2

Starting a Loyalty Card Transaction from a Financial Transaction .......................................................138

6.4.3

Transferring the Balance to a New Gift Card ........................................................................................138

6.4.4

Selecting the Balance Due Payment Method .........................................................................................139

6.4.5

Entering the Optional Information.........................................................................................................140

6.4.6

Entering the Activation Amount............................................................................................................141

6.4.7

Entering the Benefit Amount .................................................................................................................141

6.4.8

Entering the Number of Points for a Redemption..................................................................................142

6.4.9

Entering the Redemption Amount .........................................................................................................143

6.4.10

Entering the Bonus Code .......................................................................................................................143

6.4.11

Entering the Pre-Tax Amount................................................................................................................144

6.4.12

Cardholder Prompts: Gift.......................................................................................................................145

6.5

The Menu Feature - Gift/Loyalty ...............................................................................................................148

6.5.1

The ERNEX Menu ................................................................................................................................148

6.5.2

The Gift/Loyalty SETUP Menu.............................................................................................................149

6.5.3

The Gift/Loyalty VOUCHER HEADER Menu.....................................................................................151

6.5.4

The Gift/Loyalty REPORT FUNCTIONS Menu ..................................................................................152

6.6

Gift/Loyalty Admin Transactions ..............................................................................................................153

6.6.1

Gift/Loyalty Card Inquiry......................................................................................................................153

6.6.2

Voiding a Gift/Loyalty Transaction.......................................................................................................154

6.6.3

Gift/Loyalty Close Batch .......................................................................................................................155

6.6.4

Gift/Loyalty Initialization ......................................................................................................................155

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual v

Table of Contents

6.7

Gift/Loyalty Reports....................................................................................................................................157

6.7.1

Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report after a Financial Report ........................................................................157

6.7.2

Printing a Stored Transactions Report for Gift/Loyalty Transactions ...................................................157

6.7.3

Printing a Gift/Loyalty Open Batch Totals Report ................................................................................158

6.7.4

Gift/Loyalty Transaction Inquiry Report ...............................................................................................159

6.7.5

Clerk Subtotalling on Gift/Loyalty Transactions...................................................................................160

6.7.6

Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for All Clerks...............................................................................161

6.7.7

Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for a Group of Clerks...................................................................161

6.7.8

Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for One Clerk...............................................................................162

6.7.9

Printing Gift Tip Totals..........................................................................................................................163

6.7.10

Printing the Gift/Loyalty Configuration Parameters List.......................................................................164

6.7.11

Printing a Gift/Loyalty Help List ...........................................................................................................165

7 THE AIR MILES REWARDS PROGRAM ............................................................. 167

7.1

The Air Miles Rewards Program ...............................................................................................................167

7.1.1

Configuring Air Miles ...........................................................................................................................167

7.1.2

Air Miles Rewards Transactions............................................................................................................167

7.1.3

Air Miles Rewards Administration........................................................................................................167

7.2

Configuring the Air Miles Rewards Program...........................................................................................167

7.2.1

The Air Miles REWARDS SETUP Menu.............................................................................................168

7.2.2

Planning the Rewards Program Configuration ......................................................................................169

7.2.3

Rewards Program Planning Worksheet .................................................................................................170

7.2.4

Reward Program Components - Calculator and Factor Values .............................................................171

7.2.5

Reward Program Components - Bonus Offer Values ............................................................................174

7.2.6

Reward Program Components - Incentive Values .................................................................................176

7.2.7

Order of Calculation ..............................................................................................................................176

7.2.8

Rewards Calculation Table ....................................................................................................................177

7.2.9

Enable the Rewards Program.................................................................................................................178

7.2.10

Select the Type of Rewards Program.....................................................................................................179

7.2.11

Configure the Calculator and Factor Values..........................................................................................179

7.2.12

Configure the Incentive Values .............................................................................................................180

7.2.13

Configure the Maximum Rewards Allowed ..........................................................................................181

7.2.14

Set the Rewards Totals Reset Time of day ............................................................................................181

7.2.15

Enable the Enter Reference Number Prompt .........................................................................................182

7.2.16

Configure the Bonus Offers ...................................................................................................................182

7.2.17

Configure the Tax Type.........................................................................................................................184

7.2.18

Configure the SAF Upload Time Period................................................................................................185

7.3

Air Miles Transactions ................................................................................................................................186

7.3.1

Air Miles Rewards - Purchase ...............................................................................................................186

7.3.2

Add Bonus Offers during a Rewards Purchase......................................................................................187

7.3.3

Applying the Incentive to an Air Miles Rewards Purchase ...................................................................187

7.3.4

Air Miles Rewards - Refund ..................................................................................................................187

7.3.5

Add Bonus Offers during a Rewards Refund ........................................................................................188

7.4

Air Miles Admin Transactions ...................................................................................................................189

7.4.1

Completing Air Miles Reward Transactions .........................................................................................189

7.4.2

Printing the Air Miles Rewards SAF List..............................................................................................190

7.4.3

SAF Log Status Icons ............................................................................................................................190

7.4.4

Deleting a transaction from the Air Miles Rewards SAF List ...............................................................190

7.4.5

Printing an Air Miles Rewards Totals Report........................................................................................191

7.4.6

Printing the Air Miles Rewards Transaction List ..................................................................................192

7.4.7

Printing an Air Miles Rewards Configuration List ................................................................................193

vi Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

Table of Contents

7.4.8

Printing an Air Miles Rewards Help List...............................................................................................193

7.4.9

Rewards - Reprint Last Receipt .............................................................................................................194

8 ADMIN TRANSACTIONS ..................................................................................... 195

8.1

Log On ..........................................................................................................................................................195

8.2

Log Off..........................................................................................................................................................195

8.3

Clear Storage...............................................................................................................................................196

8.4

Training Mode .............................................................................................................................................197

8.4.1

Training Mode .......................................................................................................................................197

8.4.2

Transactions Available in Training mode..............................................................................................197

8.4.3

Gift/Loyalty Reports ..............................................................................................................................199

8.4.4

Entering Training Mode.........................................................................................................................200

8.4.5

Exiting Training Mode...........................................................................................................................200

9 REPORTS ............................................................................................................. 201

9.1

Clerk Subtotalling Reports .........................................................................................................................201

9.1.1

Clerk Subtotals Report for All Clerks....................................................................................................201

9.1.2

Clerk Subtotals Report for One Clerk....................................................................................................201

9.1.3

Clerk Subtotals Report for a Group of Clerks........................................................................................202

9.2

Printing the Configuration Parameters Report ........................................................................................203

9.3

EMV Parameters List..................................................................................................................................204

9.4

EMV Transaction Data ...............................................................................................................................204

9.5

Current Batch Totals Report......................................................................................................................204

9.6

Deposit Totals Inquiry.................................................................................................................................205

9.7

Tip Totals Report.........................................................................................................................................205

9.8

Printing a Help List .....................................................................................................................................206

9.9

Merchant Subtotals Report.........................................................................................................................207

9.10

Printing the Pre-Authorization List ...........................................................................................................207

9.11

Delete a Pre-Authorization using Transaction Inquiry ............................................................................208

9.12

Private Label Transactions on Reports .....................................................................................................210

9.13

Printing a Stored Transactions Report......................................................................................................210

9.14

Transaction Inquiry Report........................................................................................................................211

9.14.1

Printing a Transaction Inquiry Report ...................................................................................................213

9.14.2

Transaction Inquiry - Reprinting the Merchant Receipt Copy...............................................................213

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual vii

Table of Contents

10 END-OF-DAY PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 215

10.1

Merchant Close ............................................................................................................................................215

10.2

System Close.................................................................................................................................................216

10.3

Close Batch...................................................................................................................................................216

10.4

Multi-terminal Reports ...............................................................................................................................217

10.4.1

Multi-Terminal Report for All Terminals ..............................................................................................217

10.4.2

Multi-Terminal Report for One or More Terminals by Name ...............................................................218

10.4.3

Multi-Terminal Report for One or More Groups of Terminals .............................................................219

11 TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................................... 221

11.1

Additional Documentation ..........................................................................................................................221

11.2

Telephone Assistance...................................................................................................................................221

11.3

Merchant Direct...........................................................................................................................................222

11.4

Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................................222

11.5

Error Messages on the iWL220 Terminal .................................................................................................222

11.6

Hardware Problems.....................................................................................................................................243

11.7

Understanding DECLINED Messages.......................................................................................................246

viii Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

1 Introduction

1.1 What's New in 2.16

Control the manual entry of card information on the terminal keypad (new

configuration options).

Turn off/on the keystroke beep (new configuration option).

See "Optional Features" section for details about these new features, or call the Moneris

Merchant Contact Centre to discuss how these features can benefit your business.

New look for idle (READY) screen . See also new READY screen icons for:

-

base power status

-

battery charge level

-

charge status

-

Ethernet connection status

-

Training mode indicator

-

wireless signal status

1.2 Getting Started

You must prepare your terminal before you process transactions:

1.

Set up the Hardware .

2. Configure the terminal

.

3.

Initialize

the terminal.

4.

Log onto

the Moneris Host.

Once the terminal is ready to use, practise performing transactions in Training mode

to ensure that any errors made while learning to perform transactions do not affect your business account.

1.3 Learning About the Terminal

The Moneris iWL220 terminal is a mobile, short-range wireless debit and credit card payment system that connects to the point-of-sale (POS) services provided by Moneris Solutions.

To introduce yourself to the terminal, read these sections:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

Features & Procedures

READY Screens

Training mode

MAIN Menu

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 1

1 Introduction

1.4 Caring for your Moneris Hardware

Proper care of your terminal and

base will help ensure uninterrupted service. Here are some

recommendations for maintaining the hardware in good working order:

IMPORTANT: Misuse of equipment can result in replacement liability.

• DO clean the hardware components with a dry or slightly damp cloth rinsed in a mild soap solution.

• The terminal must be

powered off for all cleaning operations.

• Do NOT use solvents, detergents, cleaning fluids or abrasives on any of the hardware components.

• Avoid spilling liquids on components.

• Do NOT expose components to extreme temperatures.

1.4.1 Caring for the Terminal

• Clean the magnetic stripe reader (MSR) periodically, using the cleaning card provided with your terminal. To obtain additional MSR cleaning cards,

contact the

Moneris Merchant Service Centre .

Note: Do NOT use the MSR cleaning card in the chip card reader.

• It is recommended that merchants obtain their POS stationery and paper rolls from

Moneris to ensure that these supplies comply with the applicable specifications.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre

to obtain additional supplies for your terminal.

Load the paper into the printer correctly.

• If the terminal has battery recharging or communication problems, gently clean the golden contact under the terminal with a damp cloth. Do not scratch or scrape the surface of the contacts.

1.4.2 Caring for the Base

IMPORTANT: You must use the exact power adaptor and cable provided with the base by Moneris Solutions. Failure to do so may affect the operability of, or cause damage to the base and Moneris Solutions shall have no liability whatsoever for a failure to follow these instructions.

• Avoid unnecessary movement of the terminal base to prevent accidental disconnection of any of the cables.

2 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Your terminal can be set up to accept and process a variety of transactions for a variety of cards including debit cards, magnetic stripe credit cards, chip cards (credit and debit), private label cards, purchasing cards, and gift/loyalty cards. The terminal can also be set up to process cheque authorizations and to prompt for entry of a Tip amount by the cardholder for debit/credit transactions and gift transactions. The terminal supports many other features.

2.1 Standard Features

These features are available and enabled on all Moneris iWL220 terminals.

Backlight

Bilingual Displays and Receipts

Chip Card Processing

Ethernet Communication

Menu-driven interface

Shortcut Codes

Stored Transactions

Stand-by Mode

Training Mode

Wireless terminal-to-base Communication

2.1.1 Backlight

Both the screen and the keypad can be lit up to make reading and responding to the prompts easier in low-light locations such as restaurants. The backlight will turn off automatically after a preset amount of time of no activity. The backlight will turn on again the first time any button is pressed.

IMPORTANT: The buttons on the keypad still function normally even when the backlight is turned off. For example, if you press the key when the backlight is off, the MAIN MENU appears, and the backlight comes on.

2.1.2 Card Number Masking

To reduce the risk of fraudulent card use, masking and/or truncation is applied to card numbers: Only a portion of the card number is masked with an '*' (i.e., an asterisk is printed in place of the remaining digits of the number). The expiry date is not printed on any receipt copy.

IMPORTANT: Do not disable Merchant Receipt Card Number Masking

. If Merchant

Receipt Card Number Masking is disabled, the Card number will be fully displayed on the Merchant copy of the receipt.

2.1.2.1 On Receipts

Card masking is dependent on payment type (i.e., credit or debit) and the card issuer.

For credit (and some debit chip) cards:

[Cardholder copy] The card number will appear masked as ***************1234 while no Expiry date appears at all.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 3

2 Features and Procedures

[Merchant copy] The card number will appear as 1234***********1111 while the

Expiry date will appear masked as ****.

For most debit cards:

[Cardholder copy] The card number will appear masked as 1234567891*********.

[Merchant copy] The card number will appear masked as 1234***********1111.

For loyalty and gift cards:

[Cardholder copy] The card number will appear masked as ***************1234 and no Expiry date appears.

[Merchant copy] The card number will appear masked as 1234***********1111 and no Expiry date appears.

For Air Miles Rewards cards:

An Air Miles Rewards card number will appear fully as 12345678911.

2.1.2.2 On Reports

Expiry dates are not printed on reports.

2.1.3 Communications Status

As the terminal communicates with the Moneris Host through the base, the terminal displays

PROCESSING to indicate that the transaction is proceeding correctly.

The following communication indicators are displayed in the information header portion of the terminal display screen:

Ethernet communication (if you are using IP)

Dial communication (if you are using dial or dial backup)

The terminal also provides information on the

status of the wireless communication between

the terminal and the communications base.

2.1.3.1 Wireless Signal Status (Bluetooth)

Icon(1) Icon(2) Description

The terminal is receiving a wireless signal from the base and can process transactions.

The terminal must be registered to a communications base and be within the coverage area of that base to process transactions. If the wireless signal status icon does not appear, the terminal cannot process transactions.

(1) This wireless signal status icon appears in the top right corner of the READY screen.

(2) The wireless signal status icon appears in the top right corner of the terminal display on

the following screens: MAIN MENU

,

TRANSACTIONS ,

REPORT FUNCS ,

ADMIN

FUNCS

, and CONFIG FUNCS

.

4 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.1.3.2 Ethernet Communication Status

If your terminal is using Ethernet communication to communicate with the Moneris Host, the terminal will connect to the Moneris Host each time you begin a transaction (the connection process does not generate any noise).

(1) These icons appear in the top left corner on the

READY screen

.

(2) These icons appear in the top left corner on the following screens: MAIN MENU

,

TRANSACTIONS

,

REPORT FUNCS

,

ADMIN FUNCS , and

CONFIG FUNCS .

Icon (1) Icon (2) Description

Ethernet Connection Available indicator - appears under normal conditions; indicates that the terminal is configured to use Ethernet communication (icon 2) and the Ethernet connection is up.

Ethernet Connection not Available (i.e., the "Eth" text does not appear above icon 1) - appears when there is a problem with the Ethernet connection.

Note: Icon 2 appears only if the terminal is configured to use Ethernet communication but no Ethernet has been detected.

An error message

may also appear.

If your communications base is configured to use Ethernet communication AND the dial parameters are configured on your terminal AND your base is connected to a dial line:

• when there is a problem with the Ethernet connection, the terminal will automatically tell the base to which it is registered to attempt to use the dial line to communicate with the Moneris Host, and the

ETHERNET COMMS ERROR-DIAL USED PRESS

OK prompt will appear.

2.1.3.3 Dial Communication Status

If your is using dial communication to communicate with the Moneris Host, the terminal will ask the base to dial the Moneris Host each time you begin a transaction. (The base does not make any noise when it dials.)

• Under normal conditions the terminal will not indicate the status of the dial line.

• If there is a problem with the dial communication, an

error message will appear.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 5

2 Features and Procedures

2.1.4 The Menu Feature

All transactions and functions can be accessed through menus and sub-menus.

- Scroll down: press

For quicker access to transactions and functions use the Short-cut codes .

2.1.4.1 The Main Menu

The Main menu (see MAIN MENU below) gives you access to sub-menus that allow you to select financial transactions, manage processed financial transactions and configure your terminal to perform the transactions you need.

The menus are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

MAIN MENU

Opens the:

TRANSACTIONS

ERNEX

REWARDS

REPORTS

TRANSACTIONS menu

Ernex Gift and Loyalty menu

Air Miles REWARD menu

REPORT FUNCS menu

ADMIN

ADMIN FUNCS menu

CONFIG FUNCS menu

CONFIGURATION

To access the MAIN MENU:

from the READY screen:

• Simply press the

key.

2.1.4.2 The Transactions Menu

This menu allows you to select the type of transaction you wish to process.

The transactions are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until a specific feature is enabled.

TRANSACTIONS

Allows you to:

PURCHASE

REFUND

PRE-AUTH

P-A ADVICE

Process a credit or debit Purchase transaction.

Process a credit or debit Refund transaction for a portion of or the full amount of the original Purchase.

Process a Pre-Authorization transaction.

Process an Advice (to complete a Pre-Authorization Transaction).

P-A ADVICE LST

Complete or delete multiple Pre-Auth transactions from a list.

Note: This item appears only if

Tip Reporting

is enabled.

6 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

PAYMENT

CHEQUE AUTH

VOID-PURCHASE

VOID-REFUND

VOID-PAYMENT

Processes a private label Payment transaction.

Note: This item appears only if the terminal is set up on the

Moneris Host to process this transaction.

Connect to a cheque authorization service and obtain approval based on a

credit card

or driver's licence .

Note: This item appears only if the terminal is set up on the

Moneris Host to process this transaction.

Void a credit or debit Purchase transaction for the full amount of the original Purchase transaction. In effect this cancels the original

Purchase transaction.

Void a credit or debit Refund transaction for the full amount of the original Refund transaction. In effect this cancels the original

Refund transaction.

Void a private label Payment transaction.

Note: This item only appears if the terminal is set up on the

Moneris Host to process this transaction.

To access the TRANSACTIONS menu:

from the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

2.1.4.3 The Reporting Functions Menu

This menu allows you to produce a variety of reports and perform a close batch on your terminal.

The reports are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until a specific feature is enabled.

REPORT FUNCS

Allows you to print:

CLOSE BATCH

TRANS LIST

TRANS INQUIRY

DEPOSIT TOTALS

A Batch Totals report and close the current batch in order to deposit funds in your account.

A list of all stored transactions by date or by batch.

A list of transactions based on selected criteria and print duplicate

Merchant Copies of receipts and delete Pre-Authorization transactions.

A report listing deposit totals by card and transaction type.

MERCH SUBTOTAL

A report listing totals in the current batch by card and transaction type.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 7

2 Features and Procedures

TIP TOTALS

MULTI TERM RPT

CLERK INQUIRY

PRE-AUTH LIST

A report that shows the Tip summary of all Purchase and Pre-

Auth Advice transactions for the current batch.

Note: This item appears only if

Tip Reporting

is enabled.

A Deposit Totals report for each terminal associated with your

Moneris Merchant ID

This item appears only if Multi-Terminal Reporting is enabled.

A report listing totals for a

specific clerk , a

group of clerks or

all clerks

This item appears only if Clerk Subtotalling

is enabled.

A list of Pre-Authorization transactions based on selected criteria.

CONFIG LIST

EMV PARAMS LIST

A report listing the current settings for each parameter.

A report listing the current EMV parameter settings.

HELP LIST

A list of the functions and transactions with their Shortcut codes.

To access the REPORT FUNCS menu:

from the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

2.1.4.4 The Admin Functions Menu

This menu allows you to perform the administrative functions required to manage your terminal.

The functions are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

ADMIN FUNCS

LOGON

LOGOFF

Allows you to:

Log on to the Moneris Host and allow the terminal to process transactions.

Log off of the Moneris Host and prevent the terminal from processing transactions.

REPRINT

EMV TRNS DATA

Print a duplicate copy of the most recently printed receipt or report.

Print the DE55 data for the most recent EMV transaction that has gone online.

8 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

LANGUAGE

Switch the language displayed on the terminal and printed on the merchant copy of the receipt from English to French and vice versa.

BACKLIGHT

Turn the display backlight off and on.

Enter and exit Training mode.

TRAINING

CLEAR STORAGE

Clears all stored transaction data (including card data) for debit, credit, gift, and loyalty transactions from the terminal's memory.

Power down the terminal.

POWER OFF

To access the ADMIN FUNCS menu:

from the

READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCTIONS menu appears.

2.1.4.5 The Configuration Menu

The Configuration menu (see CONFIG FUNCTIONS below) contains a list of parameters and programs that can be enabled and configured on the iWL220 terminal.

IMPORTANT: A number of these programs require agreements between the merchant and a service provider other than Moneris Solutions. Please ensure that the necessary agreements are in place before attempting to configure those programs on the terminal.

The parameters and programs are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until another feature is enabled.

CONFIG FUNCS

Allows you to:

INITIALIZATION

GENERAL PARAMS

Configure the communications (if not using Dial) and other parameters that affect all transactions, e.g., tip entry and admin card protection.

DIAL CONFIG

Initialize the terminal to the Moneris Host.

HOST SETUP

PRINTER CONFIG

Configure the parameters required to use a regular phone line to communicate with the Moneris Host.

Configure Moneris Host parameters when Ethernet communication is enabled.

Configure the receipt printing options including number of copies, signature lines and trailer messages on your receipt.

BASE CONFIG

Register the terminal to a communications base.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 9

2 Features and Procedures

MULTI TERM CFG

CLERK TOTALS

CLERK MAINT

DEFAULT CLERK

PURCHASE CARD

REMOTE D-LOAD

RESTORE DEFLT

Configure a terminal in order to use multi-terminal reporting.

Configure the terminal to display the Clerk ID prompt.

Add and remove Clerk IDs (if Clerk Totals is enabled).

Configure the Default Clerk ID on a terminal.

Configure the merchant name and tax type for processing purchasing and corporate cards.

Download upgrades from the Moneris Host.

Reset all of the parameters on the terminal to the factory defaults.

To access the CONFIG FUNCS menu: from the

READY screen :

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

2.1.4.6 The General Parameters Menu

The General Parameters menu allows you to enable and configure the optional features on your terminal.

The parameters are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until another feature is enabled.

GENERAL PARAMETERS

Allows you to:

COMMS TYPE

Select the communication type.

DECLINED BEEP

TIP REPORTING

TIP ENTRY

TIP PERCENTAGE

CHIP PRE-AUTH

Enable/disable terminal beep when a financial transaction has been cancelled, declined, or not completed.

Enable/disable Pre-Authorization Advice List (found in the TRANSACTIONS menu) and a Tip Totals report

(found in the REPORT FUNCS menu).

Enable/disable Tip prompts during debit or credit Purchase transactions.

Define a default Tip Percentage.

Enable/disable processing Pre-Authorization transactions using chip credit cards as well as magnetic stripe credit cards.

10 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

COMM WARNINGS

CASH BACK

C BACK AMT 1

C BACK AMT 2

C BACK AMT 3

CASHBACK LIMIT

BALANCE PROMPT

INVOICE NUMBER

TAKE IMPRINT

PROVINCE CODE

MAIL/TEL ORDER

BACKLIGHT TIME

CONTRAST

ADMIN PROTECT

RESTAURANT

CTLS READER

CTLS LOGO

2 Features and Procedures

Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the

Moneris Merchant Service Centre.

Enable/disable the ENTER CASH BACK prompt during debit Purchase transactions.

Set a preset Cashback Amount option during debit

Purchase transactions.

Set a higher preset Cashback Amount option during debit

Purchase transactions.

Set the highest preset Cashback amount or give the customer the option to key in another amount during debit

Purchase transactions.

Set the maximum Cashback amount that can be entered during debit Purchase transactions.

Enable/disable the ARE TOTALS BALANCED? prompt during the Close Batch transaction.

Enable/disable the ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen during all financial transactions.

Enable/disable the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF

CARD AND PRESS OK prompt during financial transactions (e.g., credit) in which the Card number is manually entered.

Set the default Province Code value for Cheque

Authorization transactions using a driver's licence.

Enable/disable identifying a credit transaction as a Mail

Order or Telephone Order during the transaction.

Set the amount of terminal idle time before the backlight turns off automatically.

Adjust the level of contrast on the display screen.

Enable the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt on all transactions accessed from the REPORTS, ADMIN and

CONFIGURATION menus.

See your restaurant POS vendor's documentation.

Enable/disable the contactless functionality that allows the terminal to communicate with and accept information from cards that are tapped or waved over the internal contactless reader.

Enable/disable printing of the generic Contactless logo on contactless transaction receipts.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 11

2 Features and Procedures

SURCHARGE AMT

SURCH MIN LMT

SURCH MAX LMT

KEY BEEP

MANUAL ENTRY

Do NOT configure unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

Do NOT configure unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

Do NOT configure unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

Enable/disable the keystroke beep.

Enable/disable the option to key in card data when the terminal prompts you to enter a card during a financial transaction.

2.1.4.7 Base Configuration Menu

The terminal's Base Configuration menu allows you to configure the base to which your terminal is (or will be) registered.

Note: This menu can be accessed from the Configuration menu

or by using Admin Code 17 .

The parameters are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

BASE CONFIG

CONVERT BASE

Allows you to:

Enable the base for contact-based terminal registration.

REGISTER BASE

BASE IP SETUP

SET TIME-OUT

Register a terminal to a communications base.

Configure the Ethernet/IP settings for the communications base to which the terminal is (or will be) registered/connected.

Note: This menu item appears only the COMMS TYPE parameter

is enabled for ETHERNET.

Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

2.1.4.8 Base IP Setup Menu

This menu allows you to configure the Ethernet communication parameters for the communications base to which one or more terminals has been registered. Not all functions are available for every Ethernet communication type.

The parameters and programs are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

BASE IP SETUP

Allows you to:

ETHERNET SETUP Select the base type (dynamic or static), and enter the base address information depending on the base type selected.

DNS SETUP Enter the base's Primary and Secondary DNS addresses (used only for static IP communication).

PING Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

12 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

CONNECT T-OUT

RETRY CONNECT

ERROR REPORT

Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

To access the BASE IP SETUP menu, from the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

The BASE CONFIG menu appears.

4. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the key.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears.

2.1.4.9 The Printer Configuration Menu

This menu allows you to set the printer and receipt settings that work best for your business.

The functions are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

PRINTER CFG

PRE-PRINT

Allows you to:

Set the printer to begin printing the beginning of the receipt while you enter the transaction information. DO NOT enable this feature .

NO OF COPIES

PRINT DELAY

P-A TIP LINE

SIGNATURE LINE

PRINT P-A ADV

RCPT LIMIT-M

PRINT PRE-AUTH

CARD MASKING-M

Select the number of receipts to print for each transaction.

Set the length of time the printer waits before printing the next copy of the receipt

Print a separate line for a Tip amount on Pre-Authorization transaction receipts.

Print a signature line on credit transaction receipts. (Not necessary for terminals that process MOTO transactions).

Print receipts for Pre-Auth Advice transactions.

Print receipts for Pre-Authorization transactions. (Not necessary for some businesses).

Enable masking of the customer's Card number on the Merchant copy of the receipt. Masking is enabled by default. DO NOT change this setting .

Suppress the printing of the Merchant copy of the receipt if the

credit Purchase qualifies as a signatureless transaction .

Printing is enabled by default. Do NOT change this setting.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 13

2 Features and Procedures

RCPT LIMIT-C

TRAILER MSG

Suppress the printing of the Cardholder copy the receipt if the

credit Purchase qualifies as a signatureless transaction .

To access the PRINTER CFG menu:

from the READY screen:

Add personalized messages (in English and/or French) to the bottom of Cardholder copy of the receipts.

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

3. Scroll down to PRINTER CONFIG, and press the key.

2.1.5 Admin Codes

To access transactions directly without having to navigate through a number of menus, use the

key and the Admin codes listed here.

Financial transactions

,

gift/loyalty transactions and

Air Miles transactions

can be accessed using a 3-digit code.

• Other transactions can each be accessed using a 2-digit code:

Reporting Transactions

Administrative Transactions

Configuration Transactions

To start a transaction or function using the Admin code, at the READY screen:

1. Press the key twice.

2. Key in the code and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

Note: You can also use Admin codes from the

TRANSACTIONS menu

, the REPORT

FUNCS menu

, the ADMIN FUNCS menu and the

CONFIG FUNCS menu

by pressing the

key once.

14 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Financial Transactions

Purchase

Refund

Pre-Auth

Pre-Auth Advice 103 FIND ORIGINAL

TRANSACTION?

YES

NO

YES - step 4 of "Advice - Pre-Authorization Sequence

Number"

NO - step 4 of "Advice - Voice Authorization Number"

Pre-Auth Advice List

Private Label Payment

Cheque Authorization 105

Driver's Licence

- step 4 of "Cheque Authorization with a Driver's

Licence"

Credit Card

- step 4 of "Cheque Authorization with a Credit Card"

Purchase-Void

Refund-Void

Payment-Void

Reporting Transactions

TRANSACTION CODE

Close Batch

Transaction List

Transaction Inquiry

Deposit Totals Inquiry

Tip Totals

Merchant Subtotals Inquiry

Multi-Terminal Report

Clerk Subtotals Inquiry

Pre-Authorization List

Configuration Report

EMV Parameters Report

Print Help List

96

95

85

82

99

60

66

77

62

16

19

40

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 15

2 Features and Procedures

Administrative Transactions

TRANSACTION CODE

Log on

Log off

Reprint

(a receipt or report)

EMV Transaction Data

Language

(change between English and French)

Backlight

Training

Clear Storage

Power off

39

05

91

49

02

03

29

41

04

Configuration Transactions

Note: Not all items appear on the list at all times.

TRANSACTION CODE

Initialization

01

General Parameters

Host Setup

08

11

Dial Communication Setup

Printer Setup

Base Configuration

Multi-Terminal Configuration

15

14

17

80

Clerk Subtotalling Configuration

Clerk ID Maintenance

Default Clerk ID

Purchasing (Corporate) Card

Remote Download

Restore Default Settings

83

84

81

50

97

98

Gift/Loyalty Transactions

TRANSACTION CODE

Initialization (Gift/Loyalty)

301

Communication (Gift/Loyalty)

Configuration List

(Gift/Loyalty)

332

316

16 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Enable Ernex

(Gift/Loyalty)

Disable Ernex (Gift/Loyalty)

General Parameters (Gift/Loyalty)

Open Batch Totals

(Gift/Loyalty)

Reprint

(Gift/Loyalty)

Routing Code (Gift/Loyalty)

Help List

(Gift/Loyalty)

Transaction List (Gift/Loyalty)

Ernex Transaction Inquiry

(Gift/Loyalty)

Tip Totals

(Gift)

Clerk Subtotal Inquiry

(Gift/Loyalty)

Close Batch (Gift/Loyalty)

Points Purchase

/ Gift Purchase

Points Refund

/ Gift Refund

Redemption

(Loyalty)

Activate Loyalty card

/

Activate/Load Gift Card

Deactivate Loyalty card

/

Deactivate Gift Card

Card Inquiry

(Gift/Loyalty)

Void (Gift/Loyalty)

Reports (Gift/Loyalty)

Setup

(Gift/Loyalty)

312

306

307

309

310

Air Miles Rewards Transactions

TRANSACTION CODE

Reward Purchase

Reward Refund

Reward Program Transaction List

SAF Transaction Inquiry

Reward Program Totals

Upload SAF

Reward Configuration List

Reward Program Set-up

Reward Reprint

Reward Help List

205

206

207

208

201

202

203

204

209

210

300

311

302

304

366

370

382

399

329

330

340

360

322

323

308

390

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 17

2 Features and Procedures

2.1.6 Stored Transactions

The terminal can store up to 500 approved credit and debit transactions in its memory. These transactions are searchable, allowing you to print reports and reprint receipts in the event of a disputed transaction.

IMPORTANT: The oldest transaction is dropped once the terminal memory reaches capacity. If your terminal is replaced, the memory cannot be transferred to the new terminal, and is therefore lost. Moneris recommends printing a list of all transactions on the old terminal before disconnecting it then installing the new terminal.

2.1.7 Training Mode

Training mode allows you and your employees to practise operating the Moneris iWL220 terminal without affecting your terminal total amounts, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

Note: Once you enter Training mode you can not change the terminal language. If you wish

to change the terminal language you must exit Training mode, change the terminal display language

, and then enter Training mode again.

When using a chip card to perform chip transactions in Training mode, the card will prompt for a PIN even if the card requires a signature in normal processing mode. The terminal will then display PIN ENTERED BY CUSTOMER instead of allowing the PIN to be entered.

After five seconds the terminal will continue the transaction.

2.1.8 Wireless Communication on the iWL220

The iWL220 wireless, handheld terminal runs on a and connects to a communications base

via wireless communications instead of a cable. This means that you can take the portable iWL220 terminal to your customer.

The communications base also charges the terminal battery.

2.1.9 Stand-by Mode

The terminal automatically goes into stand-by mode when it is not in use for a set time period.

In stand-by mode, the blue backlight is off.

To exit Stand-by mode, press any key.

To change the time period when the backlight turns off, refer to the "General Parameters"

section.

2.2 Optional Features

These features may be available on your iWL220 depending on the configuration of your

Merchant ID on the Moneris Host. If the feature is available and you wish to use it, you must enable and configure the feature. If you do not wish to use an enabled feature, you can deactivate it.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre to discuss these options and determine whether changes to your Merchant ID configuration are required in order to enable them.

Balanced Prompt on Close Batch

Cashback on Debit

Cheque Authorization

Clerk Subtotalling and Clerk IDs

18 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Contactless Transactions

Credit-Only Processing

Dial Backup for Ethernet Communication

Declined Beep

Loyalty and Gift programs

Invoice Number prompt

Keystroke Beep

Mail Order and Telephone Order Transactions

Manual Card Entry (configurable options)

Multi-Terminal Reporting

Personalized Message on Receipts

Pre-Authorization Advice List

Pre-Authorization as Default Transaction

Pre-Authorizations using Chip Cards

Private Label Cards

• Restaurant Point-of-Sale Integration*

Rewards Program - Air Miles

Signatureless Transactions

(credit)

Tax and reference number info on Corporate Cards

Tip Entry by Cardholder

Tip Line on Pre-Authorization Receipts

Tip Percentage

Tip Reporting

*Please refer to your restaurant POS vendor's documentation.

2.2.1 Balanced Prompt

Use this feature to display a prompt during a Close Batch

that asks you to indicate whether the

terminal totals on the Stored Transactions report match the Moneris Host totals printed on the

Current Batch Totals report (printed during the Close Batch).

This prompt is used solely for your in-house record keeping and is not reported to the Moneris

Host.

2.2.2 Cashback

This feature gives your customers the option of withdrawing cash from their debit account when they make a Purchase at your place of business. You provide the cash to your customer, and your business account is reimbursed for the amount of the Cashback when the Close

Batch transaction is processed.

Cashback is only available on debit

Purchases .

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 19

2 Features and Procedures

Perform a Stored Transactions Report to check the number of debit Purchases that included

Cashback and the total dollar amount of all Cashback transactions in the terminal memory

2.2.3 Cheque Authorization

This feature allows you to give your customers the option of paying with a cheque while reducing your risk of accepting an NSF cheque. Use the terminal to connect to a cheque authorization service and obtain approval based on the identification your customer provides.

The customer's driver’s licence

or credit card can be used as identification for this transaction.

2.2.4 Using a Chip Card

Cards with a chip in them, called "chip cards," must be inserted into the chip card reader

and left in the reader for the entire transaction. The terminal will display the REMOVE CARD prompt when it is time to remove the chip card from the chip card reader.

Chip cards can be customized by the card issuer to have different applications and methods of verifying the cardholder; therefore, different chip cards may have different prompts: Some prompt for a PIN (like a debit card), others print a signature line on the receipt (like a stripe credit card) for the cardholder to sign.

If the chip card prompts for a PIN, the cardholder must key in their PIN. If the PIN is incorrect, the cardholder will be prompted to retry.

Note: Not all chip card types are currently supported. If you insert an unsupported chip card, you will be prompted to swipe the card.

Note: If you swipe a supported chip card, you will be prompted to insert the chip card.

If the transaction cannot be completed with the chip card, request another form of payment, and tell the cardholder to contact the card issuer.

As a best practice, always look for "VERIFIED BY PIN" on the Merchant copy of the receipt:

If "VERIFIED BY PIN" appears, no signature is required.

If a signature line appears, the cardholder must sign the receipt.

2.2.4.1 Identifying a Chip Card:

Every time a cardholder presents a card (debit or credit) for payment:

20 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.2.4.2 Using a Chip Card

There are five basic steps to performing a transaction with a chip card.

1. Begin the transaction, and follow the prompts.

2. Check for the chip on the credit or debit card every time a cardholder presents a card for payment.

3. If the card has a chip: When the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears,

insert the chip card

into the chip card reader. Make sure that the card is facing up (the chip on the visible front side), and the chip-end of the card is inserted into the reader first. Leave the card in the reader for the entire transaction.

Note: If you don't see a chip, swipe the card

on the terminal .

4. Follow the prompts, and have the cardholder follow their prompts.

5. Remove the chip card when the REMOVE CARD prompt appears. The terminal will beep if the chip card is left in the chip card reader after the transaction is completed.

2.2.5 Contactless Reader

If contactless functionality is enabled

on the terminal, your customers may pay for qualifying

purchases by tapping or waving their contactless card over the contactless reader

imbedded behind the

terminal screen.

2.2.5.1 Using a Contactless Card

At the POS, a customer may

tap or wave a contactless card over the internal contactless reader

behind the display screen.

Note: The term "contactless card" includes other payment formats such as key fobs and mobile devices (i.e., smartphone payment apps). Like a traditional contactless debit/credit card, these other payment formats may be tapped or waved over the contactless reader.

General Contactless Transaction Guidelines

Contactless transactions can be performed subject to the following conditions:

- Only Purchases and Refunds may be contactless.

- A valid contactless card must be used.

- The amount of the transaction must be equal to or less than the

maximum Contactless Dollar Value (CDV) set for the card.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 21

2 Features and Procedures

Identifying Valid Contactless Cards

• Credit cards: One of these labels must appear on the card:

- MasterCard PayPass or

- Visa payWave or

- Amex ExpressPay

• Debit cards: This label must appear on the card:

- INTERAC Flash

Maximum Contactless Dollar Value (CDV)

Contactless cards can be tapped at the SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD prompt for an amount

( Purchase

or Refund

) that is equal to or below the maximum Contactless Dollar Value set for the card type.

Credit Cards: If a card is tapped for an amount that exceeds its maximum CDV, the terminal will display the CONTACTLESS TRANSACTION LIMIT EXCEEDED message.

Debit Cards: If a card is tapped for an amount that exceeds its maximum CDV, the terminal will display the TAP FAILED PLEASE INSERT OR SWIPE CARD prompt.

Note: The maximum CDV for contactless debit cards is determined by the card and does not appear on any terminal report.

1. Print a terminal

Configuration report . (Refer to the "Printing the Configuration Parameters

Report" procedure.)

2. Look near the bottom of the report for the dollar values:

* Purchase amount, including taxes, must be equal to or less than the $ value.

Tapping a Contactless Card

The card does not have to touch the terminal (but it is all right if it does).

The card must be within 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) of the display screen to allow the contactless reader (imbedded behind the screen) to read the card.

The card must be tapped or waved by itself (e.g., the customer cannot leave the card in

their wallet and wave it over the contactless reader).

22 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.2.6 Clerk Subtotalling

This feature allows you to produce Clerk Subtotals reports tracking financial totals and the number of transactions performed using the Clerk Inquiry function.

The Clerk Inquiry function can be performed for

one clerk

, a

group of clerks or

all clerks

on one or more terminals.

Totals are calculated according to the Clerk ID entered during a transaction or the Default

Clerk ID .

2.2.7 Clerk IDs

Clerk IDs are unique identifiers of one to six characters that a terminal operator keys in when prompted for each transaction they perform. This allows you to produce

Clerk Subtotal

Reports tracking financial totals and number of transactions.

A maximum of 255 Clerk IDs can be added for one Merchant ID.

Once Clerk Subtotalling and Clerk IDs are set up, the Clerk IDs associated with your

Merchant ID can be used on any handheld terminal that has been configured using your

Merchant ID.

2.2.7.1 Default Clerk ID

A default Clerk ID can be assigned on the terminal and all transactions performed on that terminal will be added to the Default Clerk IDs totals regardless of which operator performs the transaction. The terminal will not prompt for a Clerk ID if a Default Clerk ID has been set.

2.2.7.2 Clerk ID Groups

Clerk IDs are defined as a group when they share up to five common starting characters (a prefix).

For example, Clerk IDs P1, P12 and P134 can be entered as a group with the prefix P1. When performing reports, all Clerk IDs that begin with the characters P1 are reported as Group P1.

2.2.8 Corporate Cards

Corporate cards (also known as purchasing cards) are a special type of credit card that provide enhanced reporting data to help cardholders with cost allocation, tax compliance and account reconciliation.

If this feature is enabled on your terminal, the terminal will prompt for a Customer Reference number and tax amounts when a corporate card is swiped or keyed in for a transaction. The

Customer Reference number and tax amounts will be printed on the receipt and will also appear on the cardholder's monthly statement from the corporate card issuer.

2.2.9 Credit-Only Processing

If your business accepts only credit card payments (i.e. does not accept debit card payment), you may wish to have a credit-only terminal that processes only magnetic stripe credit cards and chip credit cards.

Note: Some debit chip cards may still be used at a credit-only terminal.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre to determine whether this option meets your business needs.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 23

2 Features and Procedures

2.2.10 Dial Backup for Ethernet Communication

When Ethernet communication is not available, the base to which the terminal is registered will attempt to use dial communication as backup. After a transaction is performed on a terminal/base using dial as backup, the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

Note: When dial backup is used, the terminals (if more than one is registered to a single base) cannot share the dial line. Only one terminal can process a transaction at a time and each transaction must be completed before the next transaction can be attempted.

To allow the communications base to use dial backup, a dial cable

must be connected to the communications base, and the appropriate

dial parameters (e.g., the dial prefix) may have to

be configured.

When the base uses dial backup, the message ETHERNET COMMS ERROR-DIAL USED

PRESS OK appears on the terminal. Press the key to acknowledge the message and return to the READY screen. The base will revert to Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

2.2.11 Declined Beep

If the Declined Beep feature is enabled, the terminal will emit a beep to alert you whenever a financial transaction is cancelled, declined, or not completed.

2.2.12 Invoice Number Prompt

This feature enables a prompt to key in an Invoice number for every credit and debit financial transaction. If this feature is activated, you have the option of entering an Invoice number or bypassing the prompt by simply pressing the key when the prompt appears.

2.2.13 Gift/Loyalty Programs

The Moneris Gift/Loyalty program allows you to offer your customers two electronic cardbased programs that are activated and processed through the iWl220 terminal:

Gift Cards : allows you to offer your customers stored-value gift cards for pre-defined

dollar values as well as variable-value cards and rechargeable cards.

Loyalty Points : allows you to reward customer loyalty by awarding points based on

the dollar value of Purchases a cardholder makes.

To enable a gift/loyalty program on your terminal:

1. Contact Moneris Solutions.

2. Enable Ernex

on the terminal.

3. Initialize

the terminal to the Moneris Host.

IMPORTANT: If you process more than one card plan with Moneris, maintain a list of the card names along with the first 14-character card description that will be displayed on the terminal screen during step 6 of the

Transaction Inquiry

report. This will allow the terminal operator to easily identify which card plan description to select.

4. If you wish to enable Tip Prompting (gift Purchases only):

a. Enable the gift/loyalty Tip Entry

parameter.

b. If you wish to define a default the Tip Percentage, configure the gift/loyalty Tip

Percentage

parameter.

24 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.2.14 Keystroke Beep

This feature allows you to enable/disable

the keystroke beeping on the terminal.

2.2.15 MOTO Transactions

If your business receives orders by Internet, mail or telephone, you can still process credit card (and some chip debit card) transactions by enabling the

Mail Order/Telephone Order

(MOTO)

feature. This allows you to process transactions without the cardholder and their card being present in your place of business.

The key difference between regular transactions and MOTO transactions is that the cardholder and their card are not normally present. This means that:

• MOTO transactions are performed by keying in the Card number and the Expiry date. The card cannot be swiped or inserted. If the card is swiped or inserted, the terminal will perform a regular credit (or debit) transaction, not a MOTO transaction.

• "MAIL/TEL" must be selected (as opposed to "REGULAR") during the transaction.

• The cardholder signature is not required.

• Receipts do not need to be printed; however, Moneris recommends printing the

Merchant copy and retaining it for your records.

To process MOTO transactions, you must configure your terminal to prompt for MOTO

selection.

2.2.16 Manual Card Entry

If all available card entry methods fail, you may manually enter the card number for credit cards and some chip debit cards. (You can control the manual entry of card information on the terminal keypad by configuring the terminal's

Manual Entry parameter.)

1. Wait for SWIPE CARD or SWIPE OR INSERT CARD or SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD to display on the terminal.

2. Key in the card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears.

3. Key in the card’s expiry date (MMYY), and press the key.

If SWIPE ADMIN CARD appears, swipe the POS Admin card .

If “TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF CARD AND PRESS OK appears, take a manual imprint of the card, and then press the key.

2.2.17 Multi-Terminal Reporting

This function allows you to perform the Close Batch function and print the Deposit Totals report on all terminals or a group of terminals associated with the same merchant number from one of the terminals.

For example, if you have 15 named terminals associated with your merchant number, you simply perform the Multi-Terminal Report function on one of the 15 terminals and the Close

Batch and Deposit Totals functions are performed on all 15 terminals at the same time.

The totals are cleared in the terminal that performs the Multi-Terminal Reporting function, but the totals are not cleared on the other associated terminals.

To use Multi-Terminal Reporting, you must

enable the Multi-Terminal Report function on

each terminal.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 25

2 Features and Procedures

2.2.18 Personalized Message on Receipts

This feature allows you to configure your terminal

to print a personalized trailer message at

the bottom of your receipts. The language of the message will match the language on the customer’s card if the card is swiped or the language selected during the cardholder prompts.

If the Card number and Expiry date are keyed in, the language of the customer’s receipt will match the language displayed on the terminal.

2.2.19 Pre-Authorization as the Default Transaction

If you operate a service-based business such as a car rental location, a restaurant or a hotel and generally process Pre-Authorizations rather than Purchases, you may wish to have your

READY screen

configured to default to a Pre-Authorization

transaction rather than a

Purchase transaction.

This feature must be set at the Moneris Host and is downloaded to your terminal during

Initialization . To change it, please contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre.

To use chip cards (credit and some debit) in addition to magnetic stripe credit cards for Pre-

authorizations, you must configure the terminal to allow for Pre-Authorizations with chip cards .

To perform a Pre-Auth

transaction from the Pre-Auth READY screen

, refer to the "Pre-

Authorization as Default" procedure.

2.2.20 Private Label Cards

Use this feature to offer your customers a credit card that can be used exclusively in your store(s). Depending on the program you create with the private label card issuer, you can process standard financial transactions,

Payment

and Payment Void transactions as well as

produce reports of your Private Label transactions.

2.2.21 The Air Miles Rewards Program

The Air Miles rewards program allows you to offer your customers the opportunity to collect miles on a loyalty card based on the dollar value of Purchases they make. Some programs also provide miles based on the purchase of specific items or incentive calculations that can be implemented for a specific time period.

2.2.21.1 Configuring Air Miles

To enable an Air Miles rewards program on your terminal:

1. Contact Moneris Solutions.

2.

Plan how the program will calculate miles .

3.

Configure Air Miles on your terminal.

4.

Initialize your terminal .

2.2.21.2 Air Miles Rewards Transactions

Reward Purchase

Reward Refund

2.2.21.3 Air Miles Rewards Administration

Reprint

the last Air Miles Reward receipt

Rewards Totals Report

Rewards Transactions Report

26 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Rewards SAF Transactions Report

Deleting Rewards SAF Transactions

Completing Rewards

Transactions

• Printing the

Rewards Configuration Report

• Printing the

Help List

of Rewards Transactions and Admin codes

Configuring

the Air Miles Rewards Program

2.2.22 Signatureless Transactions: Credit Cards

A “signatureless” transaction is a swiped or tapped credit Purchase for which a customer signature is not required because the amount of the Purchase is equal to or less than the maximum

Signatureless Dollar Value (SDV) set for the card. The terminal may be

configured to print a Merchant copy and/or a Cardholder copy or no receipts at all.

Note: If your Merchant account is enabled for signatureless transactions, you may

configure your terminal so that it does not print a Cardholder copy (or even a Merchant

copy) of the receipt for qualifying Purchases. (For instructions refer to the "Configuring the Receipt Format" procedure.) It is strongly recommended that you configure the terminal to print a Merchant copy for your records.

2.2.22.1 If a Merchant Receipt Prints

If a Merchant copy of the receipt prints for a qualifying transaction, the statement "NO

SIGNATURE REQUIRED" appears on the receipt instead of a cardholder signature line.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT obtain a signature, but retain this receipt for your records.

Note: Receipts are always printed for Refunds, Void-Purchases, Void-Refunds or any

Cancelled / Declined / Not Completed transaction. A signature line will appear on receipts for Refunds, Void-Purchases, or Void-Refunds; you or the cardholder will be required to sign a copy of the receipt depending on the type of transaction.

2.2.22.2 Card Entry Method

Only a Purchase

can qualify as a signatureless transaction. Cards must either be tapped or

swiped on the terminal. The Purchase amount including all taxes must be equal to or less than

the maximum Signatureless Dollar Value

of the card type.

2.2.22.3 Maximum Signatureless Dollar Value (Maximum SDV)

To find the maximum SDV for a card and card entry method, print a terminal Configuration

Parameters report. (Refer to the "Printing the Configuration Parameters List" procedure.)

Look the bottom of the report for these values:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 27

2 Features and Procedures

* Purchase, including tax, must be equal to or less than the $ value.

** Purchase, including tax, must be less than the $ value.

2.2.22.4 Printing Receipts upon Request

IMPORTANT: If the customer requests a receipt, you must give it to them. Use the

Reprint function

to print the Cardholder copy of the receipt.

If you need a

Merchant copy , refer also to the "Transaction Inquiry--Reprinting the Merchant

Receipt Copy" procedure.

2.2.23 Terminal Names

If you have more than one terminal operating in one location, you can use this feature to identify individual terminals by assigning a unique alphanumeric name to each terminal.

If you are using the Multi-Terminal Report

function, a Terminal Name must be assigned to each terminal you wish to include in the Multi-Terminal Report and Batch Close processes.

2.2.24 Tip Entry by Cardholder

This feature gives your customers the option of entering a Tip on the terminal during a debit or credit Purchase transaction rather than leaving cash or writing the Tip amount on a Pre-

Authorization receipt. Tip entry is generally used in service-based industries.

The Tip Entry prompt may be configured

to appear only for debit Purchase transactions or for both debit and credit Purchase transactions. During Tip Entry configuration, you may enable a default Tip percentage prompt and/or the option(s) to enter a percentage or dollar amount

Tip that is customer-defined.

Even if enabled, the cardholder's Tip Entry prompt will not appear during:

• Contactless transactions

• MOTO Purchase transactions because the cardholder is presumed not to be present for these types of transactions and, therefore, cannot key in a Tip amount.

• Pre-Authorization transactions

• Pre-Auth Advice transactions

• Refund transactions

• Void transactions

28 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Note: Tip entry may also be enabled for gift Purchases if the Moneris Gift program is

enabled on your terminal.

2.2.25 Tip Line on Pre-Authorization Receipts

This feature gives your customers the option of adding a Tip to the Purchase amount on a Pre-

Authorization transaction by indicating the Tip amount on the Merchant copy of the receipt. It is traditionally used in restaurants and other service-based businesses.

If you wish to allow cardholders to add a Tip to Purchase transactions as well as Pre-

Authorization transactions, you must enable the Tip Entry

feature.

2.2.26 Tip Percentage

Defining a default

debit/credit Percentage gives your customers the option to select your

default Tip percentage to calculate the Tip amount during debit and/or credit Purchases.

2.2.27 Tip Reporting

If Tip Reporting is enabled, the Pre-Authorization Advice List transaction and the Tip Totals report appear as menu items.

Pre-Authorization Advice List

From this Advice list, you can complete or delete multiple Pre-Auth transactions as well as record a Tip amount (if any was added by the cardholder) for every completion.

• The

Tip Totals report

This report prints a summary of all Tip amounts entered for Purchase and Pre-

Authorization Advice transactions stored in the current or a previous batch.

2.3 Standard Procedures

These procedures are followed for all configurations of the terminal.

Powering on the terminal

• Using

Admin Shortcut Codes

Changing the Terminal Display Language

Inserting a Chip Card

Swiping a Stripe Card

• Performing

Pre-Authorization and Advice Transactions

Cancelling a Transaction

Cancelling a Report

Reprinting a Receipt or Report

Dealing with Disputed Debit Transactions

PAN Fraud Check

• Requesting

Code 10 Authorization

Terminal Security

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 29

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.1 Powering On the iWL220

The handheld terminal does not have an ON/OFF switch.

To power on the terminal when the terminal is not on a powered base: a. if the battery is charged, simply press the key. Or Dock the terminal on a

powered base

(communications or charge-only)

Note: When the terminal is docked on a powered base it (the terminal) is always on; however, it is not using battery power.

2.3.2 Powering Off the iWL220

To help reduce battery usage, power off the terminal when you are not using it and it is not on a powered base. To power off the terminal from the READY screen:

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the terminal is not docked on the base.

1. Press the

Method #1

key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

Note: The READY screen must display a

$0.00 value.

Method #2

Using this method to power off the terminal is only applicable if you begin from the

READY screen.

2. Press the key again.

The ENTER ADMIN CODE entry screen appears.

3. Key in 49, and press the key.

The POWER OFF TERMINAL? prompt appears.

1. Press the key.

The POWER OFF TERMINAL? prompt appears.

4. Press the key (YES).

The terminal powers off (the backlight goes off and the display screen goes blank).

2. Press the key (YES).

.

The terminal powers off (the backlight goes off and the display screen goes blank).

To reset the handheld terminal, power off the terminal, wait 30 seconds, and then power on the terminal

.

2.3.3 Charging the Battery

To recharge the battery in the terminal, dock the terminal

on a powered base

.

Note: To confirm that a base is powered, dock the terminal on the base, and wait for the

Power icon to display in the upper corner on the display screen (this may take several

seconds).

1. Confirm that both the Power icon and the Battery Charging icon (thin flashing bar below the Battery Charge Level icon ) appear at the upper corner on the screen.

2. Locate the

Battery Charge Level icon

appearing at the top of left on the screen: Wait for this icon to indicate a charge of 100%. (The Battery Charging icon may continue to flash regardless of the charge level of the battery.)

3. Also note the following:

IMPORTANT: When the battery is being charged for the first time, the handheld must be docked on a powered base for a for a minimum duration of 3 hours.

30 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

• The battery will re-charge only if it is not fully charged.

• The battery will re-charge only when the terminal is not in use.

4. If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, go back to " Getting Started

."

2.3.4 Battery Charging

The icons shown below appear on the terminal when the terminal is

docked on a base .

Icon (1) Icon(2) Description

The battery is being charged. (The icons will appear when the terminal is docked on the base.)

(1) When the terminal is docked on the base, this Battery Charging icon, the thin blinking bar

beneath the Battery Charge Level icon

, appears in the top left corner of the

READY

screen.

(2) When the terminal is docked on the base, this Battery Charging icon and the Battery

Charge Level icon appear in the top right corner of the terminal display on the following

screens: MAIN MENU , TRANSACTIONS ,

REPORT FUNCS ,

ADMIN FUNCS

, and

CONFIG FUNCS . (This icon also indicates that the base is being powered.)

2.3.5 Base Power Status

Icon (1) Icon (2) Description

The base is receiving power.

(1) When the terminal is docked on a powered base, this Power icon appears in the top left

corner of the READY

screen.

(2) When the terminal is docked on a powered base, this Power icon appears in the top right

corner of the terminal display on the following screens: MAIN MENU , TRANSACTIONS ,

REPORT FUNCS ,

ADMIN FUNCS

, and CONFIG FUNCS .

2.3.6 Battery Charge Level

Icon (1) Icon (2) % Charge Description

100% or less Fully charged battery.

75% or less Battery almost fully charged.

50% or less Half-charged battery.

25% or less

Battery almost empty.

Printing slows down, and the blue backlight goes off and cannot be turned on again until the terminal is docked on a powered base so that the battery can recharge

Empty battery. The terminal powers off (data are not lost).

.

[no icon]

0%

(1) This Battery Charge Level icon and the

Battery Charging icon

appear on the READY

screen in the top left corner.

(2) This Battery Charge Level icon and the

Battery Charging icon appear in the top right

corner of the terminal display on the following screens: MAIN MENU , TRANSACTIONS ,

REPORT FUNCS ,

ADMIN FUNCS

, and CONFIG FUNCS .

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 31

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.7 Battery Management Tips

To extend the battery life, reduce battery usage. You can

power off the terminal manually

when you are not using it, or wait for the terminal to go into

stand-by mode after a set time

period. If the handheld will be used in a well-lit area, you may wish to disable the backlight

to further reduce battery usage.

• It is safe to dock the terminal on the charging base between uses.

• Avoid frequent full discharges. Shallow (partial) discharges and frequent short charges are preferred.

• Li-ion batteries can hold a charge for many months.

2.3.8 Bilingual Displays and Receipts

2.3.8.1 Displays

The terminal displays messages and prompts in either English or French.

After the customer’s card has been swiped or inserted, the language of the messages and prompts for the customer match the card’s language code.

2.3.8.2 Receipts

Customer and merchant receipts can be printed in English, in French or bilingually.

• If the printer is configured to print separate copies for the customer and merchant

(i.e., two or three copies), the customer receipt language is based on the language code on the customer’s card OR the language selected during the cardholder prompts; the merchant receipt language is based on the current terminal language.

• If the printer is configured to print only one copy and the customer’s language code matches the terminal language, the receipt will be printed in that language. If the customer’s language code does not match the terminal language, one bilingual receipt will be printed.

2.3.9 Changing the Display Language

The terminal can display text in English or French. There are four options for changing from one language to the other:

enter Admin Code 04

access the ADMIN menu

swipe or insert the Cardholder's card

press the key when FRANCAIS or ENGLISH is displayed above it

The following two options change the default display language of both the merchant prompts and the cardholder prompts. This change is permanent until this function is used again. These options can only be used from the READY screen. They cannot be used during a transaction.

2.3.9.1 Use Admin Code 04 to Change Language

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key twice.

32 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2. Key in 04, and press the key.

3. Select the language you wish the terminal to display.

4. Press the key once.

2.3.9.2 Use the ADMIN menu to Change Language

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

3. Scroll down to LANGUAGE, and press the key.

4. Select the language you wish the terminal to display.

5. Press the key twice.

The following two options change the language for the duration of the current transaction.

The next transaction will be displayed in the default display language set up during the initial configuration of the terminal.

2.3.9.3 Swipe or Insert the cardholder's card

If the cardholder's card has a different language code on its magnetic stripe or chip, the cardholder prompts will be in the language indicated on the card.

2.3.9.4 Press the key

If FRANCAIS or ENGLISH is displayed on the screen above the key, press the key to change the language of the remaining cardholder prompts. This will only appear during cardholder prompts.

2.3.10 Taking a Manual Imprint of a Card

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF CARD AND PRESS OK prompt appears:

1. Take an imprint of the customer's card using the imprinter and appropriate Paper Sales

Draft (e.g. a VISA Purchase Paper Sales Draft for a Purchase on a VISA card).

Ensure that the Card number, issue date, Expiry date, and cardholder name are legible.

2. Print the transaction date and amount on the Paper Sales Draft.

If the transaction amount is over your Merchant Floor Limit,

call the Moneris Voice

Authorization number to obtain a Voice Authorization number for the transaction and record

the Voice Authorization number on the Paper Sales Draft.

3. PURCHASE:

Have the cardholder sign the Sales Draft.

Ensure their signature matches the signature on the card. If not,

contact the Moneris Merchant

Service Centre .

4. REFUND:

Sign the sales draft yourself.

5. Provide the customer with the Cardholder copy of the Sales Draft, and retain the Merchant copy for your records.

6. Press the key to continue the transaction.

Go back to the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 33

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.11 Cancelling a Transaction

Note: Once the terminal has begun communicating with the Moneris Host, the transaction can no longer be cancelled.

To cancel a transaction :

1.

Press the key during any of the merchant prompts.

The CANCELLED status prompt appears on the terminal screen.

If the CANCELLED REMOVE CARD prompt appears, remove the chip card from the chip card reader.

2.

If the receipt has begun printing, the text * CANCELLED* will be printed on the receipt.

Note: You may be prompted to confirm that you wish to cancel the transaction. Press the key (Yes) to cancel the transaction. The terminal will return to the READY screen automatically.

3.

Press the key to finish printing the receipts and return to the READY screen.

2.3.12 Cancelling a Report

To cancel a report:

1.

Press the key.

The CANCELLED status prompt appears on the terminal screen.

2.

If the report has begun printing, the text * CANCELLED* will be printed on the receipt.

Note: You may be prompted to confirm that you wish to cancel the transaction. Press the key (YES) to cancel the transaction. The terminal will return to the READY screen automatically.

3.

If the REPORTS menu reappears, press the key twice to return to the READY screen.

2.3.13 Reprinting a Receipt or Report

2.3.13.1 Reprinting Receipts

You can print a duplicate of the Cardholder copy or the Merchant copy of a receipt.

• To print a duplicate of the most recently printed receipt (Cardholder copy) or report, use the

Reprint function (see below).

• To print a duplicate of the Merchant copy of a receipt, use the

Transaction Inquiry

function.

2.3.13.2 Reprinting Reports

The following reports can be reprinted:

• Close Batch

• Merchant Subtotals Inquiry

• Multi-Terminal Report

• Clerk Subtotal Inquiry

• Deposit Totals Inquiry

34 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Note: If the report you wish to reprint does not appear on this list, simply perform that report function again to print another copy.

2.3.14 The Reprint Function

Use this function to print a duplicate of the most recently printed receipt or report.

• If the most recently printed item was a Financial Transaction receipt, a copy of the Cardholder copy is re-printed with the text * DUPLICATE* at the top, below the merchant address and at the bottom.

Note: To print a duplicate of the Merchant copy of the receipt, use the Transaction Inquiry

function.

• If the most recently printed item was a terminal report, a copy of the report is re-printed with the text * DUPLICATE* at the top and bottom.

There are two ways to access the Reprint function:

enter the Admin code

access the ADMIN FUNCS menu

Enter Admin Code 29

1. Press the key twice.

2. Key in 29, and press the key.

A duplicate of the Cardholder copy of the most recently printed receipt is printed.

OR

A duplicate of the most recently printed report is printed.

3. The terminal returns to the MAIN MENU.

4. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Access the ADMIN Menu

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPRINT, and press the key.

A duplicate of the Cardholder copy of the most recently printed receipt is printed.

OR

A duplicate of the most recently printed report is printed.

4. The terminal returns to the ADMIN FUNCS menu.

5. Press the key twice to return to the READY screen.

2.3.15 Disputed Debit Transactions

Do not attempt to resolve or compensate a cardholder for a disputed Debit transaction. Refer the cardholder to their financial institution.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 35

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.16 PAN Fraud Check

To reduce the fraudulent use of credit cards, this security feature prompts you to key in the last four digits of a credit Card number after the card has been swiped. The PAN Fraud Check then compares the keyed-in digits to the information contained in the card’s magnetic stripe to ensure they match.

2.3.17 Code 10 Authorization

During a transaction, if you feel that a customer, card or transaction is suspicious and needs

investigating, call the Moneris Merchant Service Centre

and state that the call is a Code 10.

This will alert the Moneris operator without alarming your customer. The operator will ask you some "Yes/No” questions and then provide instructions.

Reasons for calling in a Code 10 include:

• the signature on the credit card does not seem to match the signature on the Purchase receipt.

• the card appears to have been tampered with.

• the name on the card is inconsistent with the person’s gender.

• the customer is purchasing an unusual number of expensive items.

• the customer’s Purchases seem randomly selected, with little regard for size, quality or value.

• the customer seems nervous or signs slowly with uncertainty.

2.3.18 Terminal Security

To minimize the risk of unauthorized transactions being processed through your terminal after your business hours,

log off

the terminal at the end of each business day and

log on again at

the beginning of each business day.

The POS Admin card allows you to restrict access to various terminal functions and financial

transactions that impact your financial account (e.g., Refunds and Voids). See POS Admin card for important information about your liability for transactions performed using a POS

Admin card.

36 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.19 POS Admin Card

The Point-of-Sale Administrative card (POS Admin card) restricts access to various terminal functions as well as financial transactions that impact your financial account (e.g., Refunds and Voids).

IMPORTANT: You, the merchant, are solely responsible for the security and care of all your POS Admin cards at all times. If your POS Admin card is lost, stolen or damaged

(or you suspect it may be lost, stolen or damaged), call the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre immediately. All transactions completed with a POS Admin card are subject to the terms and conditions of your merchant agreement with Moneris. The merchant agreement contains important provisions regarding your responsibility for POS Admin card security and your liability for transactions made with a POS Admin card.

There are a number of factors that affect whether the terminal prompts for a POS Admin card including whether debit cards are processed, how the terminal is set up on the Moneris Host and whether the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt has been enabled on the terminal.

Note: To enable the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt for manually entered transactions, refer

to "Manual Card Entry."

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt always appears for the following reports, regardless of the POS Admin card configuration:

Stored Transactions List

Pre-Authorization List

Transaction Inquiry

These reports include credit and debit Card numbers.

If the

SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt is enabled

on your terminal, the prompt will appear for:

Refunds

• all types of

Voids

Payments

(if supported)

• all functions on the

REPORT FUNCS menu

• all functions on the

CONFIG FUNCS

menu

• all functions on the

ADMIN FUNCS

menu except for LANGUAGE

,

BACKLIGHT

and REPRINT

If the prompt is not enabled, the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt may still appear for:

Refunds

• all types of

Voids

Payments

(if supported)

Logon

Close Batch

Deposit Totals Inquiry

Merchant Subtotals Inquiry

• Multi-terminal configuration

and report

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 37

2 Features and Procedures

• Clerk Subtotalling configuration

and report

Remote Code Download

Restore Factory Defaults

2.3.20 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Punctuation

The following punctuation and special characters are available:

Note: These are not allowed for Clerk IDs and Invoice Numbers. using the 1 key: (space) using the 0 key: @ (at sign)

* (asterisk)

# (pound or number sign)

, (comma)

. (period or dot)

To key in alphabetic characters and punctuation:

1. Press the number key with the character you wish to display

2. Press the key repeatedly until the character appears.

For example, to key in THANK YOU. for a receipt message:

To key in this text:

T

H

A

N

K

Press these keys on the keypad:

8

4

2

6

5

[space]

1

Y

O

U

9

6

8

.

[period]

0

Note: Use the key to delete single characters.

2.3.21 Entering the Clerk ID

When the ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears: a. Key in the Clerk ID, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering Alphabetic

Characters and Punctuation ".) A Clerk ID MUST be entered. This cannot be left

blank. The Clerk ID can be up to 6 characters long and any combination of alphabetic and numeric characters (punctuation and special characters are not allowed).

Continue the transaction or report.

38 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.22 Entering the Invoice Number

When the ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears: a. Key in the Invoice number and press the key, or simply press the key to leave this blank.

The Invoice number can be up to seven characters long and any combination of alphabetic and numeric characters (punctuation and special characters are not

allowed). (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ")

Continue the transaction.

2.3.23 Entering Original Amount and Tip

At the ENTER ORIGINAL AMOUNT entry screen:

1. Take one of the following actions:

To proceed with the completion, continue at step 2.

To cancel a Pre-Auth and immediately release the hold on the cardholder's funds: a. Press the key. (This automatically inputs a $0.00 dollar value.) b. Press the key. c. Refer back to the Advice transaction.

2. Depending on the amount that appears, do one of the following:

If an dollar amount appears (this is the same value that is printed on the original Pre-Auth receipt), press the key to accept.

If the original Pre-Auth amount not including the Tip has changed, key in a new amount, and press the key.

If $0.00 appears (i.e., for a Force Post), key in the amount written on the Paper Sales draft, and press the key.

The ENTER TIP AMOUNT entry screen appears.

3. Key in the Tip amount (if any) written on the Tip line of the original Pre-Auth receipt, and press the key.

The FINAL AMOUNT $#.##-OK? prompt appears (the amount includes the Tip if any).

4. Press the key.

Refer back to the Advice transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 39

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.24 Deleting a Pre-Auth from the Pre-Authorization Advice List

Note: This operation does not immediately release the hold on the cardholder's funds.

At the DELETE PRE-AUTH? screen:

DELETE PRE-AUTH?

00000000000 0000

PA $999,999.99

YES NO

1. Press the key (YES) to delete the Pre-Auth transaction.

The P-A ADVICE LIST appears if there are remaining uncompleted Pre-Auths; otherwise, the TRANSACTION NOT FOUND message appears.

2. Do one of the following:

If the TRANSACTION NOT FOUND message appears, press the key to return to the READY screen.

If the P-A ADVICE LIST menu appears but you wish to return to the READY screen, press the key twice.

If the P-A Advice LIST menu appears and you wish to complete another Pre-Auth, refer

back to the "Advice - Using Pre-Authorization Advice List" procedure beginning at step

8 .

2.3.25 Entering the Promo Code

When the ENTER PROMO CODE prompt appears: a. Key in the promotional code supplied to you by the private label card provider and press the

key (Refer to " Entering Alphabetic Characters and Punctuation

"), or simply press the key to leave this blank.

The next prompt appears.

Continue the transaction.

2.3.26 Finding the Original Sequence Number

The Original Sequence number needed for a Pre-Auth Advice is found on the Pre-

Authorization receipt.

If the Receipt number is:

X00000000-123-456-789-0

Then the Original Sequence number is: 456789

40 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.27 Transaction with MOTO Enabled

Note: Even if enabled, the Tip Entry prompt will not appear a MOTO transaction because the cardholder is presumed not to be present and therefore cannot key in an amount.

When the terminal prompts you to select either REGULAR or MAIL/TEL, do the following:

If cardholder is present... If cardholder is NOT present... a. Select REGULAR. b. Continue the transaction. a. Select MAIL/TEL.

The MOTO options appear. b. Select the type of MOTO transaction to be processed:

To process a one-time transaction, select

SINGLE.

OR

To process a transaction that occurs on a regular basis (e.g. a monthly donation), select

RECURRING.

OR

To process a transaction that occurs as part of a monthly payment plan, select INSTALLMENT. c. Go back to the transaction.

2.3.28 Enter Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card

When the ENTER XXX AMOUNT entry screen appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST):

1. Key in the Tax amount, and press the key, or simply press the key to leave this blank.

The ENTER CUSTOMER REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

2. Key in the Customer Reference number, and press the key, or simply press the

key to leave this blank.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

Continue the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 41

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.29 Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit

1. Follow the prompt that appears:

If CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE appears, pass the terminal to the cardholder without pressing the key. The cardholder presses the key.

2. Have the cardholder follow the prompts that appear:

Note: The prompts below are listed in the order in which they would appear. (The prompts that appear are dependent a number of factors, including transaction type, merchant setup, and card type.)

If the

SELECT LANGUAGE prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the Display

Language for Chip Cards" procedure.

If the

SELECT <Application name> prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the Chip

Card Application" procedure.

If the AUTHORIZATION AMOUNT $#.##-OK? prompt appears (chip Pre-Auth only), the cardholder presses the key to accept the displayed amount.

If the

CASH BACK?

prompt appears (debit Purchase only), refer to the “Entering

Cashback Amount” procedure.

If the PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears, the cardholder presses the key to accept the displayed amount.

Note: If a Cashback prompt appeared, the cardholder can re-enter their Cashback (if entered incorrectly) by pressing the key to go back to the original Cashback prompt.

If the

ENTER TIP OR PRESS OK AA% OTHER

prompt appears (Purchase only), refer to the "Entering a Tip: Default Percentage Enabled" procedure.

If the

ENTER TIP OR PRESS OK % $

prompt appears (Purchase only), refer to the

"Selecting Percentage or Dollar Amount Tip" procedure.

If the

ENTER TIP PERCENTAGE entry screen appears (Purchase only), refer to the

"Entering a Percentage Tip" procedure.

If the

ENTER TIP AMOUNT

entry screen appears (Purchase only), refer to the "Entering a Dollar Amount Tip" procedure.

If the PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears (Purchase only), the cardholder presses the key to confirm the displayed amount.

Note: If a Tip was entered, the cardholder can re-enter their Tip (if entered incorrectly) by pressing the key to go back to the original Tip prompt.

If the

SELECT ACCOUNT

prompt appears (debit only), refer to the “Account Selection” procedure.

If the

ENTER PIN & OK entry screen appears, refer to the PIN Entry procedure.

3. Depending on the card used, do one of the following:

If a credit card was used, continue the financial transaction procedure.

If a debit card was used, continue below at step 4.

4. When APPROVED and/or RETURN TO CLERK appears, the cardholder returns the terminal to you.

42 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

Note: If the card is inserted (chip transaction), the cardholder removes their card from the chip reader. If the cardholder requested a cashback (debit only), then CASH BACK $#.## also appears in the prompt.

5. Press the key when the APPROVED message appears.

6.

Process the receipts that print

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

2.3.29.1 Selecting the Display Language for Chip Cards

When the SELECT LANGUAGE prompt appears during a chip card transaction:

1. The cardholder presses the key to view their prompts in English the key to view them in French.

2. Continue following the "Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

2.3.29.2 Selecting the Chip Card Application

When the chip card has more than one application that the terminal also supports, the

SELECT <Application name> prompt appears. The application to be used to process the current transaction must be selected.

Note: On the display <Application name> is replaced with the name of the first application in the list of available applications.

The cardholder selects the application during a Purchase or Pre-Authorization transaction.

You, the Merchant, select the application during a

Refund, Purchase-Void, or Refund-Void :

Selecting Application for Purchase or Pre-Authorization transaction:

When the SELECT <Application name> prompt appears:

1. The cardholder presses the key (YES) to use the displayed application; otherwise, they press the key (NO) to view the next available application.

If The <Application name>-OK? prompt appears, the cardholder presses the key to confirm that they wish to use the displayed application.

The <Application name> SELECTED PLEASE WAIT message appears while the chip verifies that the card is valid.

2. Continue following the "Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

Selecting Application for Refund or Void transaction:

IMPORTANT: Do NOT allow the cardholder to select the application. You must select the application used to perform the original transaction (indicated on the original transaction receipt).

When the SELECT <Application name> prompt appears:

1. Press the key (YES) to use the displayed application; otherwise, press the key

(NO) to view the next available application.

If The <Application name>-OK? prompt appears, press the key to confirm that you wish to use the displayed application..

The <application name> SELECTED PLEASE WAIT message appears while the chip verifies that the card is valid.

2. Continue following the "Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 43

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.29.3 Entering Cashback Amount on Debit Purchase

When the CASH BACK? prompt appears:

1. The cardholder presses the key (YES).

The SELECT CASH BACK prompt appears.

Note: The Cashback amount will be withdrawn from the same account used for the Purchase transaction (e.g., if the cardholder selects CHEQUING when prompted to select an account, both the Purchase amount and the Cashback amount with be withdrawn from their Chequing account).

2. The cardholder selects either a Preset amount or, if the option is available, they can enter another amount as indicated below:

Preset amount: OTHER amount:

a. The cardholder presses the key (for preset Amount One), presses the key (for preset Amount Two), or presses the key

(for preset Amount Three).

PURCHASE $#.##-OK? appears.

(This includes the Cashback amount.) b.

Continue following

the "Cardholder

Prompts" procedure. a. The cardholder presses the key

(OTHER).

ENTER CASH BACK appears. b. The cardholder keys in the amount they wish to withdraw and then presses the key.

Note: The dollar value entered must be in increments of 10 (e.g., $10.00 or $20.00 or

$30.00, etc.).

PURCHASE $#.##-OK? appears. (This includes the Cashback amount.) c.

Continue following the "Cardholder

Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

2.3.29.4 Entering a Tip: Default Percentage Enabled

1. The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To enter a default Tip

Percentage:

a. The cardholder presses the key (AA%).

The PURCHASE $#.##-

OK? prompt appears

(amount includes the Tip). b.

Continue the

"Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure.

To enter a different percentage or dollar amount Tip:

a. The cardholder presses the

key (OTHER).

The ENTER TIP AMOUNT OR

PRESS OK % $ prompt appears.

b. Continue in the "Selecting

Percentage or Dollar Amount

Tip " procedure.

To bypass entering a

Tip:

a. The cardholder presses the key without making a selection.

The PURCHASE $#.##-

OK? prompt appears. b.

Continue

the

"Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure.

44 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.29.5 Selecting Percentage or Dollar Amount

1. The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To select the Tip-aspercentage option:

a. The cardholder presses the

key (%).

The ENTER TIP

PERCENTAGE entry screen appears. b.

Continue

in the "Entering a Percentage Tip" procedure.

To select the Tip-asdollar-amount option:

a. The cardholder presses the key ($).

The ENTER TIP AMOUNT entry screen appears.

b. Continue in the "Entering

a Dollar Amount Tip" procedure.

To bypass entering a

Tip:

a. The cardholder presses the key without making a selection.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears. b.

Continue

the "Cardholder

Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

2.3.29.6 Entering a Percentage Tip

1. The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To enter a desired percentage Tip:

a. The cardholder keys in a percentage value

(replaces displayed value, AA) and presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears

(amount includes the Tip). b.

Continue the "Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure.

To bypass entering a Tip:

a. The cardholder presses the without entering a value.

key

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

b. Continue the "Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 45

2 Features and Procedures

2.3.29.7 Entering a Dollar Amount Tip

1. The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To enter a desired dollar amount Tip: To bypass entering a Tip:

a. The cardholder keys in a dollar amount and presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears

(amount includes the Tip). b.

Continue the "Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure. a. The cardholder presses the without entering an amount.

key

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

b. Continue the "Cardholder Prompts:

Debit/Credit" procedure.

2.3.29.8 Selecting an Account

When the SELECT ACCOUNT prompt appears:

1. The cardholder presses the key (CHEQUING) or the key (SAVINGS).

2. Continue following the "Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

2.3.29.9 PIN Entry

When the ENTER PIN & OK prompt appears:

1. The cardholder keys in their Personal Identification number (PIN) and presses the

key.

Note: Please respect the cardholder’s privacy, and encourage them to protect their PIN.

2. Continue following the "Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit" procedure.

46 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range

Mobile Hardware

The Moneris iWL220 Terminal and Base

The iWL220 is a hand-held wireless

terminal that also includes the following components: An

integrated PINpad, an integrated

printer , a

magnetic stripe card reader , a chip reader, and an

internal contactless reader. The terminal communicates over short distances with a

communications base . A

charge-only base is also available.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 47

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.1 Setting Up the Hardware

Before setting up the hardware, consider the most effective location for a communications

base.

You must perform these steps to set up the hardware:

1. Set up the

communications base

. a. To use Dynamic or Static IP, connect the

Ethernet cable to the base. To use dial as

default (note that only one terminal can be registered to a base), connect the

dial cable

.

Note: To use dial backup for Ethernet, connect the dial cable .

b. Connect the

power cable to the communications base. (If multiple terminals will be

registered to one base, connect the power cable to the other terminals' bases.)

2. Install the paper roll .

3.

Charge the terminal battery

.

4.

Register the terminal

to the communications base.

3.2 Selecting the Base Location

When deciding where to put the communications base(s) for your iWL220 POS system:

1. Consider the factors listed below

2. Review the sample floorplans

+ Centre-Obstruction Floor plan

+ Indoor/Outdoor Floor plan

+ L-Shaped Floor plan

+ Multi-Level Floor plan

3. After you receive your iWL220 POS system and configure it with the assistance of the

Moneris installation team, the Moneris representative may check the range of the base

from the spot you selected.

3.2.1 Base Location Considerations

3.2.2 Ensure a base is placed:

• on a flat, stable, horizontal surface

• in the center of the usage area with a large, open, unobstructed area surrounding the base

• so that the usage area is within the maximum range of the base:

Indoor max. = 60 m (196 ft)

Outdoor max. = 120 m (393 ft)

The range will vary depending on the environment.

• at least 2 m (6.5 ft) away from other iWL220 communications bases, if more than one is installed

• at least 2m (6.5 ft) away from any other wireless devices that operate at 2.4 GHz

(e.g., wireless routers, cordless phone bases, etc.)

• more than 3 m (10 feet) from any microwave oven in use

48 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.2.3 Protect a base from:

• extremely high and low temperatures

• inclement weather (e.g., precipitation, high winds)

• vibrations

• dust

• dampness

• liquid spills (this includes rain)

• electromagnetic radiation (e.g., from motors, compressors, computers, radio transmitters, etc.)

3.2.4 Do not place a base near:

• computer screens

• televisions including flat screen televisions

• microwave ovens

• anti-theft barriers, etc.

• large, vertical, metal surfaces (e.g., refrigerators, large appliances, vending machines)

• cordless and cellular phones

3.2.5 Sample Floorplans

3.2.6 Center-Obstruction Floor Plan

If your location has a central area (e.g. an office or kitchen), you may be able to place the communications base at one corner of the central area and still have wireless coverage throughout your location.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 49

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.2.7 Indoor/Outdoor Floor plan

If your location has an outdoor area where you wish to use the iWL220 (e.g. a patio), try the base locations indicated below to see which provides the best coverage.

3.2.8 L-Shaped Floor plan

If the area in which you plan to use the iWL220 in your location is an L-shape, try the base locations indicated below to see which provides the best coverage.

3.2.9 Multi-Level Floor plan

If your location has more than one floor, you will need one communications base for each floor.

50 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.2.10 Testing the Wireless Communications

To check the range of the communications base and determine whether the handheld terminal can communicate with the base, perform this test.

IMPORTANT: Ensure the terminal is

registered to the communications base before

beginning this test.

a. Power on the base and

power on the handheld .

b. Walk with the handheld to the spot furthest away from the base that the handheld is likely to be used (e.g., the far side of the room or the patio).

c. While you are walking, ensure that the Wireless Signal icon

( ) is displayed on the

READY screen of the handheld the whole time.

IMPORTANT: If the Wireless Signal icon is not displayed (or there are less than three bars), transactions should not be performed when the handheld is in that spot.

3.3 Registering the Terminal to a Base

You may register your new terminal to the communications base that was packaged with it, or you may register the terminal to a different iWL220 base if that base is already functioning as a communications base.

1. Note the following before proceeding:

• Do not register the terminal to more than one base at a time.

• If you are using dial communication as default, do not register more than one terminal to the base.

• If you are using Ethernet communication and/or your terminal will be connected to a restaurant POS system, do not register more than five (5) terminals to one (1) base.

• If you are registering multiple terminals to one base, register each terminal individually.

• If you are registering the terminal to a base that is already communicating with one or more initialized terminals ensure that the initialized terminals are all using the same version of POS software:

a. For each terminal, print a Configuration Report , and refer to the

"SOFTWARE VERSION" value near the top of the report. b. Ensure that the "SOFTWARE VERSION" value is the same for each registered

terminal before proceeding with the registration of the new terminal.

Note: If the SOFTWARE VERSION value of the new terminal is not the same, do not proceed to register the new terminal.

2. Record the 8-digit Base ID as printed on a label found on the underside of the

communications base to which the terminal is to be registered.

Note: The Base ID appears as ID: 12345678.

3. Do one of the following:

If you are registering a new terminal to a new communications base (i.e., there are no

terminals currently registered to this base), follow the " Converting the Communications

Base Mode " procedure.

If you are registering a terminal to a communications base that is already connected to

one or more initialized terminals, follow the " Establishing a Connection to the

Communications Base " procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 51

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.3.1 Communications Base ID

The communications base ID (8 digits) is found on the bottom of the communications base.

The base ID below is 12345678.

3.3.2 Converting the Communications Base Mode

Follow this procedure to ensure that the base is set for contact-based registration.

1. Dock the terminal on the base to which it is being registered.

2. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card.

The BASE CONFIG MENU appears.

5. Press the key to select CONVERT BASE.

6. Press the key to select CONTACT MODE.

7. When PLEASE WAIT appears, wait while the base is converted.

Note: This process may take several seconds. Do not undock the terminal.

8. When CONVERSION SUCCESSFUL PRESS OK appears, press the key.

9. Press the key three times.

10. When TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED or the READY screen appears, follow the

" Establishing a Connection to the Communications Base

" procedure.

3.3.3 Establishing a Connection to the Communications Base

A terminal must be registered to a communications base in order to process transactions.

Registering introduces the terminal to the base so that the terminal knows which base to look for and the base knows which terminal(s) to accept transactions from.

From the READY screen or TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen:

1. Dock the terminal on the base to which it is being registered.

2. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

52 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card.

The BASE CONFIG MENU appears.

5. Scroll down to REGISTER BASE, and press the key.

The REGISTER BASE menu appears.

6. Scroll down to REM ALL BASES, and press the key.

If the DO YOU WISH TO DELETE ALL BASES prompt appears, press the key

(YES).

If NO KNOWN BASES appears, press the key.

7. Wait for the REGISTER BASE menu to appear, and then press the key to select

CONTACT MODE.

The ENTER BASE ID entry screen appears.

8. Key in the 8-digit base ID of the base on which you have docked the terminal, and press the

key.

9. Wait while the terminal attempts to establish a connection to the base.

10. The terminal returns to the REGISTER BASE menu once the connection to the base has successfully been established.

If BASE NOT FOUND appears, press the key.

11. Press the key four times to go back to the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen

(or the READY screen).

12. Confirm that your terminal screen header appears as shown here:

[A] Wireless Signal icon (3 to 5 bars should display).

[B] Base ID (e.g., "12345678")

[C] Ethernet indicator ("Eth") appears only if the terminal/base is connected to a functioning Ethernet network.

13. If the information on your terminal screen appears as shown here, go to step 14. If the

BASE NOT FOUND error appeared during the registration process, go back to step 1 and repeat the steps (ensure that you are inputting the correct Base ID).

14. If you are setting up and configuring a new terminal (i.e., TERMINAL SETUP

REQUIRED appears, go back to " Setting Up the Hardware ."

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 53

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.4 The Terminal

The terminal (handheld) consists of the following components:

Integrated printer

• Display (

READY Screen )

Keypad

Magnetic stripe reader

Chip card reader

Contactless Reader

(internal)

3.5 The Integrated Printer

A thermal printer is integrated into the iWL220 terminal. It prints black text on white, onepart thermal paper.

Note: When stored, thermal paper should not be exposed to:

- Vinyl, plastics, adhesives, shrink-wraps, wet-toner copies or certain carbon papers

- Office light, UV light

- High humidity (above 65% relative humidity)

- Temperatures above 25 degrees Celsius (77 degrees Fahrenheit)

3.5.1.1 To load a new paper roll into the terminal:

1. Pull the printer latch up and then pull it back to open the lid.

2. Remove the empty paper roll (if present) from the paper well.

54 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3. Place the new paper roll into the paper well with the loose end of the roll extended towards the front of the terminal.

4. Unroll enough paper to extend at least one inch (2.5 cm) past the purple faceplate.

5. Close the printer lid and press firmly on it until it snaps back into place and the extended paper securely pressed between the lid and the faceplate.

6. Tear off the loose end of the paper by pulling it towards the keypad.

The printer is ready to print.

Note: Once the paper roll has been installed, do not try to advance the paper by pulling it. To advance the paper (the terminal must be powered on), press and hold down the key. If

the printer ran out of paper in the middle of a receipt or report, you can reprint the receipt or report .

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 55

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.6 The Display

The display screen on the terminal displays the merchant and cardholder prompts as well as status and error messages.

The Idle screen is displayed when the terminal is not performing any transactions or functions. All transactions and functions begin at the Idle screen. There are two types of Idle screens on the terminal:

The READY screen

The TRAINING screen

3.6.1 The READY Screen

The READY screen displays "READY" over the default transaction. This screen appears when the terminal is operating normally.

If the default transaction is Pre-Auth , refer to "The Pre-Auth READY screen".

If the terminal is credit-only

, refer to "The Credit-Only READY screen".

If the READY screen isn't displayed, press the key repeatedly to access it.

3.6.2 The TRAINING Screen

The TRAINING Ready screen displays "TRAINING" (instead of "READY") over the default

transaction (Purchase or Pre-Auth). This screen appears when the terminal is in Training mode

.

To return to the READY screen, you must

exit Training mode .

56 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.6.3 The Credit-Only READY Screen

If the terminal is enabled for credit-only transactions:

The READY screen displays "READY" over "PURCHASE". This screen appears when the terminal is operating normally.

Note: Some debit chip cards may be used at a credit-only terminal.

If the READY screen isn't displayed, press the key repeatedly to access it.

3.6.4 The Pre-Auth READY Screen

If the default transaction on the terminal is Pre-Auth:

The READY screen displays "READY" over "PRE-AUTH". This screen appears when the terminal is operating normally.

If the READY screen isn't displayed, press the key repeatedly to access it.

To perform a

Pre-Auth from the Pre-Auth READY screen

, refer to the "Pre-Authorization as

Default" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 57

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.7 The Terminal Keypad

The terminal keypad contains alpha-numeric keys and

function keys .

3.7.1.1 Alpha-numeric Keys

These keys allow you to enter amounts for transactions, text for receipt messages and selection criteria for reports.

3.7.1.2 The Function Keys

KEY NAME ALLOWS YOU TO...

Power

Off

Admin

Power down the terminal

Note: Press this button only at the READY screen ($0.00 amount). The terminal must not be sitting on a base. When the POWER OFF

TERMINAL? prompt appears, select YES to power off the terminal

- Access the MAIN MENU

- Access the Admin Shortcut Code

input screen

- Enter alphabetic characters for personalized receipt text, Clerk IDs, etc.

F1

Select the option above the key (e.g. YES).

Scroll down through options.

F2

Select an option.

F3

not supported.

F4

- Select the option above the key (e.g. NO).

- Scroll up through options.

- Scroll left and right through text if the text is wider than the display.

Cancel

- Cancel a transaction.

- Return to the READY screen after completing a transaction

- Return to the previous menu when performing ADMIN functions

Correct

- Clear the last character or number entered (by the cardholder or the

merchant).

- Return to the previous cardholder prompt if no value is currently

displayed for the cardholder prompt.

- Clear the value displayed when a prompt is first displayed.

Advance paper from the printer (press and hold down until paper advances

to the desired length).

OK /

Enter

Confirm the data input is complete.

Confirm the data displayed is correct.

Select the highlighted item on a menu.

Power on a terminal not already docked on a base.

58 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.8 The Magnetic Stripe Reader

The magnetic stripe reader (MSR) is located in a slot on the right-hand side of the terminal.

When a payment card is swiped, the MSR reads the information encoded on the card's black magnetic stripe.

To correctly swipe a card on the MSR:

1. Ensure that when you swipe, the card's magnetic stripe is down and facing towards the terminal. (Cards can be swiped from the back of the terminal towards the front or from the front of the terminal towards the back.)

3.9 The Chip Card Reader on the Terminal

The chip card reader is located in a slot in the front of the terminal. When a chip card is inserted, the chip card reader reads the information on the card's chip (e.g., whether to prompt for PIN or print a signature line on the receipt).

To correctly insert the chip card in to the chip card reader:

1. Ensure that the card is facing up.

2. Position the card so that the chip is closest to the terminal's chip card reader slot.

3. Slide the card into the slot until the card stops sliding in.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

When the REMOVE CARD prompt appears, you or the cardholder must pull the card gently out of the chip card reader.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 59

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.10 The Contactless Reader on the Terminal

If contactless functionality is enabled

, your customers may pay for qualifying purchases by tapping or waving a contactless card over the terminal's contactless reader, which is imbedded behind the display screen.

1. Wait for the TAP CARD prompt to appear on the screen (usually appears as part of the

SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD prompt).

2. Tap/wave the card over the screen. For information about

using contactless cards

(e.g., qualifying amounts, supported transaction types, tips on tapping for best results), refer to the

"Using Contactless Cards" section.

3.11 Docking the Terminal on a Base

To dock the terminal, place it on the base so that the contacts slot on the underside of the terminal fits securely over the leads prong on the base.

Note: If the base is powered, the terminal will power on if it is not already turned on.

60 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.12 The Communications Base

The communications base connects one or more terminals (to a maximum of five) to the

Moneris Host via Ethernet and dial. The base is also used to charge the terminal.

3.12.1 The Ports on the Communications Base

3.12.2 Powering on the Communications base

To power the base, connect the power cable

to the power port and then plug the power cable into a power outlet.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 61

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.13 The Charge-Only Base

A charge-only base may be used to charge the terminal battery.

Battery charging occurs when the terminal is docked on a powered base.

3.13.1 Ports on the Charge-Only Base

Note: The back of your base may not appear exactly as depicted here (i.e., the ports, except the power port, may not be visible or may be capped).

3.13.2 Powering on the Charge-Only Base

To power the base, connect the power cable

to the power port and then plug the power cable into a power outlet.

62 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

3.14 The Cables

3.14.1 The Power Cable

The power cable supplies power to the base when the cable is connected to both a power outlet and the power port on the base.

IMPORTANT: You must use the exact power adaptor and cable provided with the terminal and base by Moneris Solutions. Failure to do so may affect the operability of, or cause damage to the terminal and/or base and Moneris Solutions shall have no liability whatsoever for a failure to follow these instructions.

3.14.2 Installing the Power Cable

To power up the base, simply connect the base to a power outlet as outlined below.

IMPORTANT: You must use the exact power adaptor and cable provided with the terminal and base, and use only batteries provided by Moneris Solutions. Failure to do so may affect the operability of, or cause damage to the terminal and/or base and

Moneris Solutions shall have no liability whatsoever for a failure to follow these instructions.

1.

Insert the small connector end (1) of the power cable into the small circular port on the

base .

2. Insert the plug (2) into a power outlet.The base powers on.

If this is the first time you have powered on the base, go to Setting up the Hardware .

To power off the base, simply remove the plug from the power outlet.

To reset the base, power off the base, then wait 30 seconds, and then power on the base.

3.14.3 Dial Communication Cable

When connected to a telephone wall jack and the phone port on the communications base, this cable allows the base to use dial communication.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 63

3 The Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Hardware

To connect the dial cable:

1.

Insert one end of the cable into the port on the base .

2. Insert the other end into a telephone wall jack.

Note: If you have only one handheld terminal registered to a communications base using dial communication, return to

Setting up the Hardware before configuring the dial parameters.

You must configure the appropriate

dial communication parameters (e.g., the prefix if

required to dial out at your location) before attempting to use the hardware to communicate with the Moneris Host

3.14.4 Ethernet Communication Cable

The cable pictured below allows the communications base to communicate over the Internet.

Ethernet cable

To connect the Ethernet communication cable:

1.

Insert one end of the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the

communication base .

2.

Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable into an Ethernet wall jack or a router.

You must configure the base's

Ethernet parameters before attempting to use the hardware to

communicate with the Moneris Host.

64 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

Your terminal can be set up to accept and process a variety of cards including debit cards, credit cards with a magnetic stripe, credit cards with a chip, private label cards, corporate

(a.k.a. purchasing) cards, Moneris gift cards and loyalty programs. The terminal can also be set up to process cheque authorizations.

Before you begin using your terminal to process transactions, you must configure it, inputting any special values and parameters needed for the options you wish to use.

Ensure you have the following available:

• your Merchant ID

• the Moneris Host Initialization phone number

• your POS Admin card (if required)

1.

Configure the communications parameters for the communications base to which the

terminal is registered.

2. Select the optional features you intend to use on the terminal.

3.

Configure the features and general parameters .

4.

Print a Configuration Parameters Report .

4.1 Configuring Communications

The communications base to which the terminal is registered can communicate with the

Moneris Host over Ethernet or dial communication.

If you have more than one handheld terminal registered to a communications base, it must use

Ethernet communication in order to process transactions from more than one of the handhelds at a time.

If you have only one handheld terminal registered to a communications base, it can use dial communication as the default rather than the backup, i.e. Ethernet communication is not required.

Ethernet Communication:

Public Internet - Dynamic

Private Internet - Dynamic

Public Internet - Static

Private Internet - Static

Dial Backup and Dial Communication

If Ethernet communication goes down during a transaction, the terminal/base will use dial communication to perform the transaction (if

dial backup

is available). The terminal/base will then attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

To determine whether the hardware is communicating correctly, check the communications status

icons and messages.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 65

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.1.1 Configuring Dial Communication

If your terminal is registered to a base that will communicate with the Moneris Host over a standard analog telephone line either by default or as backup, you must configure the dial parameters of every terminal registered to this base.

WARNING: Due to data security issues, terminals using dial communication must use a true analog phone line connecting to a public switched telephone network. Analog telephone adaptors (ATAs) and digital phone service over IP communication must NOT be used as an alternative to dial communication.

Moneris recommends installing a dedicated telephone line for the terminal to ensure transactions are processed quickly and reliably. Sharing the line with another device (e.g. a fax machine) can cause communication problems. Line splitters and filters are not recommended.

If you access a prompt and decide to keep the displayed value, simply press the key to keep that value and return to the previous menu.

Note: If dial backup is set up, when Ethernet communication is not available, the terminal will tell the base to use dial communication. After performing a transaction using dial as backup, the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

If you have only one handheld terminal registered to a communications base, the base can use dial communication as the default rather than the backup, i.e. Ethernet communication is not required.

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

Note: The

dial cable must be connected to the communications base to which the terminal is

registered before it can communicate with the Moneris Host using dial communication.

1.

Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2.

Scroll down and select CONFIGURATION.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. If the terminal will use dial as the default, confirm the COMMS TYPE is set to DIAL: a. Scroll to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

. b. Press the key to select COMMS TYPE.

The COMMUNICATIONS TYPE menu appears. c. Scroll to DIAL, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu re-appears. d. Press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu re-appears.

4.

Scroll down to DIAL CONFIG, and press the key.

The DIAL CONFIG menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

5.

To enter or change the PBX prefix for the seven-digit local telephone number and the tendigit long distance telephone number to the Moneris Host:

Note:

This field is optional.

66 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

a. Press the key to select PREFIX.

The PREFIX entry screen appears. b.

Key in the local PBX prefix (min. 1 digit, max. 20 digits), and press the key.

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

Note: If Call Waiting or Call Answer is activated on the phone line that the base will use, the

Prefix must be configured as: *70,, (star, seven, zero, comma, comma). Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

".

6.

To change the modem speed for the primary and backup lines: a.

Scroll down to PRI LINE SPEED, and press the key.

The PRIMARY LINE SPEED menu appears. b.

Scroll to the list item with the appropriate Baud rate, and press the key.

(The default is 1200 Baud.)

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears. c.

Scroll down to BCK LINE SPEED, and press the key.

The BACKUP LINE SPEED menu appears. d.

Scroll to the list item with the appropriate Baud rate, and press the key.

(The default is 1200 Baud.)

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

7.

To set the terminal to check that the phone line is available before attempting to use the base to dial out: a.

Scroll down to LINE AVAIL CHK, and press the key.

The LINE AVAILABLE CHECK? prompt appears. b.

Press the key (YES) to force the terminal to check that the line is available before dialing out.

Press the key (NO) to set the terminal to begin dialing without checking.

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

8.

To change the number of tones dialed per second (if you are using tone dialing rather than pulse dialing): a.

Scroll down to TONE DIAL SPD, and press the key.

The TONE DIAL SPEED menu appears. b.

Scroll to the item with the appropriate Dial Speed, and press the key. (The default speed is FAST (10), which is 10 tones per second.)

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

9.

To change the number of seconds the dial tone must be present before the connection is determined to be successful: a.

Scroll down to STABILIZATION, and press the key.

The STABILIZATION TIMER entry screen appears. b.

Key in a value (min. 0.06, max. 5.00 seconds), and press the key. (The default is 0.06 seconds.)

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

10.

To determine whether the terminal monitors the modem-to-host connection process:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 67

4 Configuring Your Terminal

a.

Scroll down to CALL PROGS CHK, and press the key.

The CALL PROGRESS CHECK? prompt appears. b.

Press the key (YES) to monitor the modem-to-host connection process.

Press the key (NO) to if the phone environment is noisy.

The DIAL CONFIG menu reappears.

11.

Press the key three times to return to the READY screen or the TERMINAL

SETUP REQUIRED prompt.

The terminal/communications base is ready to communicate with the Moneris Host over a dial line.

4.1.2 Dial Backup for Ethernet Communication

When Ethernet communication is not available, the base to which the terminal is registered will attempt to use dial communication as backup. After a transaction is performed on a terminal/base using dial as backup, the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

Note: When dial backup is used, the terminals (if more than one is registered to a single base) cannot share the dial line. Only one terminal can process a transaction at a time and each transaction must be completed before the next transaction can be attempted.

To allow the communications base to use dial backup, a dial cable

must be connected to the communications base, and the appropriate

dial parameters (e.g., the dial prefix) may have to

be configured.

When the base uses dial backup, the message ETHERNET COMMS ERROR-DIAL USED

PRESS OK appears on the terminal. Press the key to acknowledge the message and return to the READY screen. The base will revert to Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

4.1.3 Configuring Ethernet Communications

4.1.3.1 Configuring Dynamic Public IP Communication

If your terminal is registered to a base that will communicate with the Moneris Host over the

Internet using public IP with dynamic addressing, you will need to set up these parameters for the base.

Note: The

Ethernet cable must be connected

to the communications base to which the terminal is

registered

. If the base is configured to use Ethernet communication and dial backup

is available, the terminal will tell the base to use dial communication if Ethernet communication is not available during a transaction. After performing a transaction using dial

(as backup), the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

1. Follow one of the procedures below:

68 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

If terminal has NEVER been initialized: If terminal has already been initialized:

From the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen: a. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. b. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. c. Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt

appears, swipe the POS Admin card

.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears. d. Press the key to select COMMS

TYPE.

The COMMUNICATION TYPE menu appears. e. Scroll to ETHERNET, and press the

key.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. f. Go to step 2 below.

From the READY screen: a. Set the

COMMS TYPE

parameter as

ETHERNET. b. Set the

HOST SETUP parameter as PUBLIC.

(Refer to the "Configuring the Host Setup

Parameters" procedure.) c. Set the ETHERNET TYPE parameter as

DYNAMIC: i. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. ii. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. iii. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The BASE CONFIG menu appears. iv. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the menu appears.

key. The BASE IP SETUP v. Press the

SETUP.

key to select ETHERNET vi. Press the

SETUP.

key to select ETHERNET vii. Scroll down to DYNAMIC, and press the

key. viii. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. d. Go to step 2 below.

2. Test the terminal's connectivity to the Moneris Host: a. From the BASE IP SETUP menu, press the key once.

Note: If the REBOOT TERMINAL appears, wait while the terminal reboots. When the

TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or READY screen or REINITILIZATION

REQUIRED screen) appears, press the key twice, key in 17, and press the key.

If prompted, swipe the POS Admin card. When the BASE CONFIG menu appears, scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the key, then press the key once. b. When the TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK prompt appears, press the

key to return to the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or the READY screen or REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen).

Note: If the REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen appears, you must perform a reinitialization

to complete the configuration process.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 69

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.1.3.2 Configuring Dynamic Private IP Communication

If your base will communicate with the Moneris Host over the Moneris Private IP Network with Dynamic addressing, you will need to set up these parameters for the base.

Note: The

Ethernet cable must be connected

to the communications base to which the terminal is

registered

. If the base is configured to use Ethernet communication and dial backup

is available, the terminal will tell the base to use dial communication if Ethernet communication is not available during a transaction. After performing a transaction using dial

(as backup), the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

Before you begin you will need to know:

• the Moneris Region in which the terminal and base are located

1. Follow one of the procedures below:

If terminal has NEVER been

initialized:

From the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen: a. Set the

HOST SETUP

parameter as

PRIVATE. (Refer to the "Configuring the

Host Setup Parameters" procedure.)

If terminal has already been initialized:

From the READY screen: a. Set the

COMMS TYPE

parameter as ETHERNET. b. Set the

HOST SETUP parameter as PRIVATE.

(Refer to the "Configuring the Host Setup

Parameters" procedure.) c. Set the ETHERNET TYPE parameter as

DYNAMIC: b. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. c. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. d. Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS

Admin card .

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears. e. Press the key to select COMMS

TYPE.

The COMMUNICATION TYPE menu appears. f. Scroll to ETHERNET, and press the

key.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. g. Go to step 2 below. i. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. ii. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. iii. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The BASE CONFIG menu appears. iv. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the appears.

key. The BASE IP SETUP menu v. Press the

SETUP.

key to select ETHERNET vi. Press the

TYPE.

key to select ETHERNET vii. Scroll down to DYNAMIC, and press the

key. viii. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. d. Go to step 2 below.

70 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

2. Test the base's connectivity to the Moneris Host: a. From the BASE IP SETUP menu, press the key once.

Note: If the REBOOT TERMINAL appears, wait while the terminal reboots. When the

TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or READY screen or REINITILIZATION

REQUIRED screen) appears, press the key twice, key in 17, and press the key.

If prompted, swipe the POS Admin card. When the BASE CONFIG menu appears, scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the key, then press the key once. b. When the TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK prompt appears, press the

key to return to the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or the READY screen or REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen).

Note: If the REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen appears, you must perform a reinitialization

to complete the configuration process.

4. Go back to "

Configuring Your Terminal

."

4.1.3.3 Configuring Static Public IP Communication

If your terminal is registered to a base that will communicate with the Moneris Host over the

Internet using public IP with static addressing, you will need to set up these parameters for the base.

Note: The

Ethernet cable must be connected

to the communications base to which the terminal is

registered

. If the base is configured to use Ethernet communication and dial backup

is available, the terminal will tell the base to use dial communication if Ethernet communication is not available during a transaction. After performing a transaction using dial

(as backup), the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

Before you begin you will need:

• the base's IP Address

• the base's Mask ID

• the base's Gateway Address

• the base's Primary DNS Address

• the base's Secondary DNS Address

1. Follow one of the procedures below:

If terminal has NEVER been initialized:

From the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen:

If terminal has already been initialized:

From the READY screen: a. Set the

COMMS TYPE

parameter as ETHERNET. b. Set the

HOST SETUP parameter as PUBLIC. (Refer

to the "Configuring the Host Setup Parameters" procedure.) a. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. b. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. c. Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt

appears, swipe the POS Admin card

.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu c. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. d. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the

key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. e. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the

key.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 71

4 Configuring Your Terminal

appears. d. Press the

TYPE.

key to select COMMS

The COMMUNICATION TYPE menu appears. e. Scroll to ETHERNET, and press the

key.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. f. Go to step 2 below.

2. Configure the static IP parameters: a. Press the key to select ETHERNET SETUP.

The ETHERENT SETUP menu appears. b. Press the key to select ETHERNET TYPE.

The ETHERNET TYPE setup menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears,

swipe the POS Admin card .

The BASE CONFIG menu appears. f. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the

key. The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. g. Go to step 2 below. c. Scroll up to STATIC, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears listing the static parameters for the base.

Note: To enter the decimal point values, refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ."

d. Scroll down to BASE IP ADDR, and press the key.

The ENTER BASE IP ADDRESS entry screen appears. e. Key in the base's IP Address, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. f. Scroll down to BASE MASK ID, and press the key.

The ENTER MASK ID entry screen appears. g. Key in the base's Mask ID, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. h. Scroll down to BASE GATEWAY, and press the key.

The ENTER GATEWAY ADDRESS entry screen appears. k. Key in the base's Gateway Address, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. l. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SEUP menu appears. m. Enter the base's DNS Addresses:

Note: To enter the decimal point values, refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ."

i. Scroll down to DNS SETUP, and press the key. ii. Press the key to select PRIM ADDRESS.

The ENTER PRIMARY ADDRESS entry screen appears. iii. Key in the base's Primary DNS Address, and press the key. iv. Scroll down to SEC ADDRESS, and press the key.

The ENTER SECONDARY ADDRESS entry screen appears. v. Key in the base's secondary DNS address, and press the key.

72 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

vi. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears.

3. Test the terminal's connectivity to the Moneris Host: a. From the BASE IP SETUP menu, press the key once.

The REBOOT TERMINAL message appears. b. Wait for the terminal to finish rebooting and then for it to return to the TERMINAL

SETUP REQUIRED screen (or READY screen or REINITILIZATION REQUIRED screen). c. Press the key twice, key in 17, and press the key.

If SWIPE ADMIN CARD appears, swipe the POS Admin card. d. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the key. e. When the BASE IP SETUP menu appears, press the key once. f. When the TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK prompt appears, press the key

to return to the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or the READY screen or

REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen).

Note: If the REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen appears, you must perform a

reinitialization to complete the configuration process.

4. Go back to

Configuring Your Terminal

.

4.1.3.4 Configuring Static Private IP Communication

If your terminal is registered to a base that will communicate with the Moneris Host over the

Moneris Private IP Network with static addressing, you will need to set up these parameters for the base.

Note: The

Ethernet cable must be connected

to the communications base to which the terminal is

registered

. If the base is configured to use Ethernet communication and dial backup

is available, the terminal will tell the base to use dial communication if Ethernet communication is not available during a transaction. After performing a transaction using dial

(as backup), the base will attempt to use Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

Before you begin you will need:

• the base's IP Address

• the base's Mask ID

• the base's Gateway Address

• the base's Primary DNS Address

• the base's Secondary DNS Address

• the Moneris region in which the terminal and base are located

1. Follow one of the procedures below:

If terminal has NEVER been initialized:

From the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen: a. Set the

HOST SETUP

parameter as PRIVATE.

(Refer to the "Configuring the Host Setup

Parameters" procedure.) b. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

If terminal has already been initialized:

From the READY screen:

a. Set the COMMS TYPE parameter as

ETHERNET.

b. Set the HOST SETUP

parameter as

PRIVATE. (Refer to the "Configuring the Host

Setup Parameters" procedure.)

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 73

4 Configuring Your Terminal

c. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. d. Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt

appears, swipe the POS Admin card

.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears. e. Press the key to select COMMS TYPE.

The COMMUNICATION TYPE menu appears. f. Scroll to ETHERNET, and press the

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears. g. Go to step 2 below.

key.

2. Configure the static IP parameters: a. Press the key to select ETHERNET SETUP.

The ETHERENT SETUP menu appears. b. Press the key to select ETHERNET TYPE.

The ETHERNET TYPE setup menu appears. c. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. d. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears. e. Scroll down to BASE CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The BASE CONFIG menu appears. f. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the appears.

key. The BASE IP SETUP menu g. Go to step 2 below. c. Scroll up to STATIC, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears listing the static parameters for the base.

Note: To enter the decimal point values, refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

." d. Scroll down to BASE IP ADDR, and press the key.

The ENTER BASE IP ADDRESS entry screen appears. e. Key in the base's IP Address, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. f. Scroll down to BASE MASK ID, and press the key.

The ENTER MASK ID entry screen appears. g. Key in the base's Mask ID, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. h. Scroll down to BASE GATEWAY, and press the key.

The ENTER GATEWAY ADDRESS entry screen appears. k. Key in the base's Gateway Address, and press the key.

The ETHERNET SETUP menu appears. l. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SEUP menu appears. m. Enter the base's DNS Addresses:

Note: To enter the decimal point values, refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

." i. Scroll down to DNS SETUP, and press the key.

74 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

ii. Press the key to select PRIM ADDRESS.

The ENTER PRIMARY ADDRESS entry screen appears. iii. Key in the base's Primary DNS Address, and press the key. iv. Scroll down to SEC ADDRESS, and press the key.

The ENTER SECONDARY ADDRESS entry screen appears. v. Key in the base's secondary DNS address, and press the key. vi. Press the key once.

The BASE IP SETUP menu appears.

3. Test the terminal's connectivity to the Moneris Host: a. From the BASE IP SETUP menu, press the key once.

The REBOOT TERMINAL message appears. b. Wait for the terminal to finish rebooting and then for it to return to the TERMINAL

SETUP REQUIRED screen (or READY screen or REINITILIZATION REQUIRED screen). c. Press the key twice, key in 17, and press the key.

If SWIPE ADMIN CARD appears, swipe the POS Admin card. d. Scroll down to BASE IP SETUP, and press the key. e. When the BASE IP SETUP menu appears, press the key once. f. When the TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK prompt appears, press the

key to return to the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen (or the READY screen or REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen).

Note: If the REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen appears, you must perform a

reinitialization to complete the configuration process.

4. Go back to

Configuring Your Terminal

.

As the terminal communicates with the Moneris Host through the base, the terminal displays

PROCESSING to indicate that the transaction is proceeding correctly.

The following communication indicators are displayed in the information header portion of the terminal display screen:

Ethernet communication (if you are using IP)

Dial communication (if you are using dial or dial backup)

The terminal also provides information on the

status of the wireless communication between

the terminal and the communications base.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 75

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.1.4 Configuring the Host Setup Parameters

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to HOST SETUP, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The HOST SETUP menu appears.

4. Do one of the following as appropriate to your setup.

Set up the Host

Parameters as "Public" a. Scroll to PUBLIC, and press the key. b. Scroll down to "Production", and press the key. c. When TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK appears, press the key.

The READY screen (or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen or REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen) appears.

Set up the Host

Parameters as

"Private" a. Scroll to PRIVATE, and press the key. b. Scroll to the appropriate option based on your setup/location, and press the key. c. When TCP HOST CONNECTION OK PRESS OK appears, press the key.

The READY screen (or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED screen or REINITIALIZATION REQUIRED screen) appears.

Note: TCP CONNECTION FAILED may appear if you have not finished configuring your other Ethernet communication parameters.

76 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.2 Configuring the Receipt Format

This function allows you to configure the terminal to print a Pre-Authorization tip line and a signature line on credit card transaction receipts, set the number of receipt copies printed, and select which trailer messages to print on receipts.

Note: "Declined" or "Not Approved" messages always appear in reverse font.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PRINTER CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The PRINTER CFG menu appears.

Note: The default values for the following printer parameters are highlighted in reverse text

(e.g., YES ).

To start printing the receipt before all the transaction information is entered on the terminal:

DO NOT enable this feature : a. Scroll down to PRE-PRINT, and press the key.

The PREPRINTING? prompt appears. b. Press the key to select YES.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To select the number of receipts printed for a transaction:

a. Scroll down to NO OF COPIES, and press the key.

The NUMBER OF COPIES menu appears. b. Scroll down to the number of copies the terminal should print for each transaction, and press the

key at your selection. There are five options .

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To force the printer to pause between copies for a specified number of seconds:

a. Scroll down to PRINT DELAY, and press the key.

The PRINT DELAY entry screen appears. b. Key in the number of seconds the printer will wait between printing receipt copies, and press the key. The default is 99 seconds.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

Note: If, during the transaction, the operator does not want to wait for the receipt copies to print automatically, they can press the key to force the next receipt to begin printing immediately.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 77

4 Configuring Your Terminal

To print a tip line on Pre-Authorization receipts for the customer to indicate a Tip amount :

a. Scroll down to P-A TIP LINE, and press the key.

The PRINT PRE-AUTH TIP LINE? prompt appears. b. Press the key tos elect YES.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To print a signature line on Credit Card Transaction receipts (including private label and corporate cards):

Note: If a chip card requires a signature, a signature line will be printed even if this parameter is set to NO. If a chip card does NOT require a signature, a signature line will NOT be printed even if this parameter is set to YES. a. Scroll down to SIGNATURE LINE, and press the key.

The PRINT CREDIT SIGNATURE LINE? appears. b. Press the key to select YES.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To print receipts for Advice transactions:

a. Scroll down to PRINT P-A ADV, and press the key.

The PRINT PRE-AUTH ADVICE? prompt appears. b. Press the key to select YES.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To print receipts for Pre-Authorization transactions:

a. Scroll down to PRINT PRE-AUTH, and press the key.

The PRINT PRE-AUTH? prompt appears. b. Press the key to select YES.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To enable masking of the Card number on the Merchant copy of the receipt:

IMPORTANT: Masking is enabled by default (i.e., set to YES). DO NOT change this setting.

a. Scroll down to CARD MASKING-M, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The MERCHANT RECEIPT CARD MASKING? prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES).

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To suppress the printing of a Merchant copy of the receipt for any credit Purchase that

qualifies as a signatureless transaction :

Note: Merchant copy printing is enabled by default (i.e., set to YES). Moneris recommends that you do not change this setting.

78 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

a. Scroll down to RCPT LIMIT-M, and press the key.

The MERCHANT RECEIPT BELOW FLOOR LMT? prompt appears. b. Press the key (NO).

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To suppress the printing of a Cardholder copy of the receipt for any credit Purchase that qualifies as a

signatureless transaction

:

a. Scroll down to RCPT LIMIT-C, and press the key.

The CUSTOMER RECEIPT BELOW FLOOR LMT? prompt appears. b. Press the key (NO).

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

To print one or more personalized messages at the bottom of cardholder receipts:

a. Scroll down to TRAILER MSG, and press the key.

The ACTIVE TRAILER MSG menu appears.

b. Select and edit the trailer message

for cardholder receipts.

The PRINTER CFG menu re-appears.

Press the key three times to return to the READY screen.

4.2.1 Select number of receipts printed for a transaction

There are five options:

OPTION DESCRIPTION

1 COPY

2 COPIES

2 COPIES OPTN

3 COPIES

3 COPIES OPTN prints only one copy prints one Cardholder and one Merchant copy prints the first copy

To print the second copy, press the key.

To cancel the second copy, press the key. prints one Cardholder and two Merchant copies prints two copies (one Cardholder and one Merchant copy)

To print the third copy (another Merchant copy), press the

key.

To cancel the third copy, press the key.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 79

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.2.2 Select and edit the trailer message for cardholder receipts

There are

10 Trailer Message options

available in each language.

Select one of the default messages (1 through 5) and edit it to suit your requirements or select a blank message (6 through 10) to create your own promotional message.

If you have customized a trailer message, you can reset the message to the original text .

IMPORTANT: If you edit or change an English trailer message, ensure that you also edit the corresponding French message. The trailer message that prints on the cardholder receipt is determined by the language on the card's magnetic stripe.

For example: If you select Option 1 and replace ' xxxxxx' with your company name in the English message, make sure to replace the ' xxxxxx' in the French Option 1 message as well.

Note: You can select more than one trailer message to print on your receipts.

There are four lines per trailer message; each line can be from zero to 24 characters (if no double width is used) or from zero to 12 characters (if double width is used). All characters are allowed.

A. Select a trailer message option:

1. Scroll down to the option on the terminal, and press the key.

2. Select ENABLED (i.e. press the key).

3. Press the key to confirm that you wish to enable the trailer message.

B. Edit the trailer message option:

1. Scroll down to the line number and language you wish to edit

(e.g. LINE 3 ENGLISH).

2. Press the key. (This deletes the entire line.)

Note: A single message line can be from zero to 24 characters (if no double width is used) or from zero to 12 characters (if double width is used). All characters are allowed.

3. Key in the new text. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ").

Note: Once you have keyed in new text, you can use the key to delete characters one at a time.

4. Press the key to save the new line of text.

C. Format the font of the entire trailer message:

1. Scroll down to the format you wish to apply to all lines of the message (BOLD, DOUBLE

HEIGHT or DOUBLE WIDTH) and press the key.

2. Press the key to apply the format.

D. Press the key four times to return to the READY screen.

80 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.2.3 Reset the trailer message to the original text

If you have edited a trailer message, you can reset the message to the

original text .

IMPORTANT: If you edit or change an English trailer message, ensure that you also edit the corresponding French message. The trailer message that prints on the cardholder receipt is determined by the language on the card's magnetic stripe.

For example: If you reset Option 1 to the original English text, make sure to reset the

French Option 1 message as well.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PRINTER CONFIG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The PRINTER CFG menu appears.

4. Scroll down to TRAILER MSG, and press the key.

The ACTIVE TRAILER MSG menu appears.

5. Select the trailer message option you wish to reset to the

original text :

a. Scroll down to the trailer message option, and press the key. b. Scroll down and select INITIAL TEXT (i.e., press the key).

The RESET MSG TO ITS INITIAL TEXT? prompt appears. c. Press the key (YES) to confirm that you wish to reset the trailer message to the

original text .

The ACTIVE TRAILER MSG menu re-appears.

6. Press the key four times to return to the READY screen.

4.2.4 Trailer Message Options

If the Language on the cardholder's card is ENGLISH OR the cardholder selected ENGLISH during the cardholder prompts, the

ENGLISH MESSAGE selected will appear.

If the Language on the cardholder's card is FRENCH OR the cardholder selected FRANCAIS during the cardholder prompts, the

FRENCH MESSAGE selected will appear.

4.2.4.1 English Trailer Messages

1 HAPPY

HOLID

2 SPECIAL

OFF

3 XXXXXX

HAPPY HOLIDAYS

THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING

AT xxxxxx

SPECIAL OFFER ON YOUR

NEXT VISIT PRESENT THIS

RECEIPT AND RECEIVE A

10 PERCENT DISCOUNT xxxxxx

KEEP THIS RECEIPT FOR A

REFUND WITHIN 14 DAYS

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 81

4 Configuring Your Terminal

9

10

6

7

8

4 MOTHERS

DAY

5 BACK TO

SCH

MOTHERS DAY IS COMING

RESERVE YOUR SPACE

CALL xxx xxx xxxx

TO AVOID DISAPPOINTMENT

BACK TO SCHOOL SPECIAL

PRESENT THIS RECEIPT TO

CLAIM A FREE BACKPACK

WITH YOUR NEXT PURCHASE

[These messages are blank and can be used to create personalized messages for your cardholder receipts.]

4.2.4.2 French Trailer Messages

1 HAPPY

HOLID

JOYEUSES FETES

MERCI DE MAGASINER CHEZ xxxxxx

8

9

6

7

10

2 SPECIAL

OFF

3 XXXXXX

4 MOTHERS

DAY

5 BACK TO

SCH

OFFRE SPECIALE

RABAIS DE 10 POURCENT

A LA PROCHAINE VISITE,

PRESENTEZ CE RELEVE xxxxxx

POUR UN REMBOURSEMENT

DELAI DE 14 JOURS,

CONSERVEZ CE RELEVE.

LA FETE DES MERES

APPROCHE. RESERVEZ

TOUT DE SUITE.

APPELEZ AU xxx xxx xxxx

OFFER POUR LA RENTREE

SAC A DOS GRATUIT

AU PROCHAIN ACHAT,

PRESENTEZ CE RELEVE.

[These messages are blank and can be used to create personalized messages for your cardholder receipts.]

82 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.3 Disabling the Backlight

The Backlight can be disabled to reduce battery usage.

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll to BACKLIGHT, and press the key.

The BACKLIGHT menu appears.

4. Scroll to DISABLE, and press the key to turn the backlight off permanently.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears (and the backlight turns off).

Note: The backlight will no longer come on when the terminal keys are pressed.

5. Press the key twice to return to the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP

REQUIRED prompt.

4.4 Configuring Corporate (Purchasing) Cards

Use this function to indicate the type of sales tax applied in your geographic location and enter your GST and provincial tax numbers as applicable. This will determine which tax type prompt appears during corporate card transactions and the tax number that appears on the monthly statements your corporate card customers receive.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PURCHASE CARD, and press the key.

The PURCHASING CRD menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key to select PURCHASE CARD.

The ENABLE PURCHASING CARD? prompt appears.

5. Press the key to select YES.

The PURCHASING CRD menu appears with additional items.

6. Scroll down to SALES TAX TYPE, and press the key.

The SALES TAX TYPE menu appears.

7. Scroll to the combination of taxes that you are required to charge, and press the key.

The PURCHASING CRD menu appears.

8. Scroll down to MERCHNT GST NO, and press the key.

The MERCHANT GST NUMBER entry screen appears.

9. Key in your GST number, and press the key.

The PURCHASING CRD menu appears.

If necessary: a. Scroll down to MERCHNT PST NO or MERCHNT QST NO, and press the

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 83

4 Configuring Your Terminal

key. b. Key in your Provincial Tax number, and press the key.

The PURCHASING CRD menu appears.

10. Press the key three times to return to the READY screen.

The terminal is now ready to process financial transactions using corporate (purchasing)

Cards

.

4.5 Configuring Private Label

The terminal does not require additional configuration in order to process private label credit cards. However, before using private label cards you must:

• contact Moneris to obtain a list of private label card issuers.

• contact the private label card issuer and arrange for service from them.

notify Moneris that you will be using this service to ensure that your terminal's

initialization parameters are updated on the Moneris Host.

re-initialize your terminal

4.6 Configuring General Parameters

The General Parameters menu allows you to enable and configure the optional features on your terminal.

If you access a prompt and decide to keep the displayed value, simply press the key to keep that value and return to the previous menu.

Press the key repeatedly to return to the READY screen at any time.

From the READY screen OR the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1.

Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2.

Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3.

Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

To select the Communications Type:

a. Press the key to select COMMS TYPE. b. Select the appropriate communication type.

Note: You may have to do some additional configuration depending on your communications

requirements. Refer to Communications Configuration for an overview on configuring the

communications parameters on the terminal.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the Declined Beep alert:

84 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

a. Scroll down to DECLINED BEEP, and press the key.

The DECLINED AUDIBLE NOTIFICATION prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES) to enable Declined Beep.

OR Press the key (NO) to disable this feature.

The terminal beeps and then the GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the Key Beep feature:

Note: Regardless of this setting, the optionally attached PINpad will continue to emit a beep when a key is pressed during a transaction (i.e., when the customer is entering information on the PINpad as prompted). a. Scroll down to KEY BEEP, and the key.

The ENABLE KEY STROKE BEEP? prompt appears. b. Press the key(YES) to enable Key Beep.

OR Press to the key (NO) to disable Key Beep.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears.

To enable/disable Tip Reporting

(Enables option to record a Tip amount during Pre-Auth Completions (Advices) and prints a Tip amount line on Pre-Auth Completion receipts; enables Tip Totals report; enables option for completion or deletion of multiple Pre-Auths from list):

a. Scroll down to TIP REPORTING, and press the key.

The ENABLE TIP REPORTING? prompt appears. b. Press the key(YES) to enable this feature.

OR Press the key (NO) to disable this feature.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable Tip Entry:

Refer

to the "Configuring Tip Entry - Debit/Credit" procedure.

To define a default debit/credit Tip Percentage:

Note: For this feature to work,

debit/credit Tip Entry must be also enabled.

a. Scroll down to TIP PERCENTAGE, and press the key.

The ENTER TIP PERCENTAGE entry screen appears.

Note: If debit/credit Tip Entry is enabled, and the Tip Percentage value is set to "0," the cardholder will still be prompted to enter a Tip in percentage and/or dollars. (The cardholder may choose to enter nothing at all when prompted to enter Tip.) b. Key in a percentage value, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable allowing the terminal to process

Pre-Authorization transactions using chip cards (credit and

some debit cards) as well as magnetic stripe cards:

a. Scroll down to CHIP PRE-AUTH, and press the key.

The CHIP CARD PRE-AUTH ALLOWED prompt appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 85

4 Configuring Your Terminal

b. Press the key (YES) to use chip cards for Pre-Auth transactions.

OR Press the key (NO) to use only magnetic stripe cards for Pre-Auth transactions.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the CASH BACK? prompt during Debit Purchase transactions:

a. Scroll down to CASHBACK, and press the key.

The ENABLE CASH BACK? prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES) to have the CASH BACK? prompt appear.

OR Press the key (NO) to disable the CASH BACK? prompt.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To set Cashback Preset Amount 1:

Note: The amount displayed is in dollars (cent values cannot be entered: e.g., 10 = $10.00). a. Scroll down to C BACK AMT 1, and press the key.

The CASH BACK PRESET AMOUNT 1 entry screen appears.

Note: The Default amount is 10; the amount can range from 10 to 90. b. Key in the dollar value for Cash Back Preset Amount 1, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To set Cashback Preset Amount 2:

Note: The amount displayed is in dollars (cent values cannot be entered: e.g., 20 = $20.00.) a. Scroll down to C BACK AMT 2, and press the key.

The CASH BACK PRESET AMOUNT 2 entry screen appears.

Note: The Default amount is 20; the amount can be from 20 to 990. b. Key in the dollar value for Cash Back Preset Amount 2, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

Note: The amount that you key in must be less than and not equal to Preset Amount 3, but it must be greater than and not equal to Preset Amount 1.

Set Cashback Preset Amount 3:

(This can be used to set a third amount or allow a customer to enter a different amount) a. To allow your customer to key in any other amount that is less than or equal to your Cashback Limit:

1. Scroll down to C BACK AMT 3, and press the key.

The CASH BACK PRESET AMOUNT 3 entry screen appears.

2. Select OTHER (press the key).

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

Note: The amount that the customer keys in at the ENTER CASH BACK entry screen cannot be greater than your set Cashback Limit. b. To set a specific amount for Preset Amount 3:

Note: The Cashback Limit that you set does not apply to Amount 3. (For example, even if your Cashback Limit is set to $40, you could still set Amount 3 to be any value from $150 to

$990).

86 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

1. Scroll down to C BACK AMT 3, and press the key.

The CASH BACK PRESET AMOUNT 3 entry screen appears.

Note: The Default amount is 30; the amount can be from 30 to 990.

Note: The amount displayed is in dollars (cent values cannot be entered: e.g., 300 =

$300.00.)

2. Select VALUE (press the key).

Note: The amount that you key in for VALUE must be greater than and not equal to Preset

Amount 2 and greater than and not equal to Preset Amount 1.

3. Key in the amount, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To set the maximum Cashback amount that can be entered during debit Purchase transactions:

a. Scroll down to CASHBACK LIMIT, and press the key.

The CASH BACK LIMIT entry screen appears.

Note: The default is 40. b. Key in the maximum dollar amount that can be entered at the ENTER CASH BACK entry screen, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

Note: The amount displayed is in dollars (cent values cannot be entered: e.g., 40 = $40.00).

Note: The Cashback Limit amount only applies to Preset Amount 3 if the cardholder keys in an amount that is higher than the set Cashback Limit. However, if you set Preset Amount 3 to an amount that is higher than the Cashback Limit, that restriction will not apply.

To enable/disable the ARE TOTALS BALANCED? prompt during the Close Batch transaction:

a. Scroll down to BALANCE PROMPT, and press the key.

The TOTALS BALANCED PROMPT? prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES) to have the Balanced prompt appear.

OR Press the key (NO) to skip the Balanced prompt.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the ENTER INVOICE NO prompt during all financial transactions:

a. Scroll down to INVOICE NUMBER, and press the key.

The ENABLE INVOICE NUMBER? prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES) to have the Invoice Number prompt appear.

OR Press the key (NO) to skip the Invoice Number prompt.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF CARD AND PRESS OK prompt during financial transactions (e.g., credit) in which the Card number is manually entered:

a. Scroll down to TAKE IMPRINT, and press the key.

The TAKE IMPRINT MESSAGE? prompt appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 87

4 Configuring Your Terminal

b. Press the key (YES) to have the Take Imprint prompt appear.

OR Press the key (NO) to skip the Take Imprint prompt.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To set the default Province Code value for Cheque Authorization transactions using a driver's licence:

a. Scroll down to PROVINCE CODE, and press the key.

The DEFAULT PROVINCE CODE prompt appears. b. Key in the two-character alphanumeric Province code that will most likely be used during

Cheque Authorization transactions using a driver's licence, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ")

Note: The province codes are provided by the cheque authorization service.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To be able to identify a transaction (e.g., credit) as a Mail Order or Telephone Order during the transaction:

a. Scroll down to MAIL/TEL ORDER, and press the key.

The MAIL/TEL ORDER TRANSACTIONS? prompt appears. b. Press the key (YES) to have the Mail/Tel item appear.

OR Press the key (NO) to leave the Mail/Tel item off.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To set the amount of terminal idle time before the back light turns off automatically:

Note: Reducing the idle time before the backlight turns off can reduce battery usage and extend battery life. a. Scroll down to BACKLIGHT TIME, and press the key.

The BACKLIGHT OFF TIME IN SECONDS entry screen appears. b. Key in the number of seconds before the backlight turns off, and press the key.

Note: Any value between 120 to 999 will result in the backlight turning off after 120 seconds.

(The minimum is 15; the maximum is 999; the default is 60.)

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To adjust the level of contrast on the terminal display screen:

a. Scroll down to CONTRAST, and press the key.

The HOLD THE '.' AND UP / DOWN ARROW TO SET THE VALUE prompt appears. b. While holding down the key:

To decrease contrast: press the area on the panel under the key (repeatedly if necessary) until the desired contrast is reached.

To increase contrast: press the key the area on the panel above the key

(repeatedly if necessary) until the desired contrast is reached. c. Press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

88 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

To enable/disable the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt on all transactions on the REPORTS, ADMIN and

CONFIGURATION menus:

a. Scroll down to ADMIN PROTECT, and press the key.

The PROTECT ALL ADMIN OPTIONS? prompt appears. b. Press the

key (YES) to have the Admin card prompt appear for all reporting, admin and

configuration transactions.

OR Press the

key (NO) to have the Admin card prompt appear only for those transactions

that are required by Moneris.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

To enable/disable the internal contactless reader :

a. Scroll down to CTLS READER, and press the key.

The CONTACTLESS READER menu appears. b. Scroll to ENABLE, and press the key.

OR To disable this feature, scroll to DISABLE, and press the key.

PLEASE WAIT appears on the terminal's display for several seconds and then the terminal returns to the GENERAL PARAMETERS menu.

To enable/disable the contactless logo on contactless transaction receipts:

a. Scroll down to CTLS LOGO, and press the key.

The CONTACTLESS LOGO menu appears. b. Scroll to ENABLE, and press the key.

OR To disable this feature, scroll to DISABLE, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears.

Control the manual entry of card information on the terminal keypad:

IMPORTANT: Moneris strongly recommends using the default value of ADMIN

PROTECT to help reduce the risk of fraudulent transactions which can later be disputed and charged back.

a. Scroll down to MANUAL ENTRY, and press the key. b. When SWIPE ADMIN CARD appears, swipe your POS Admin card.

The MANUAL CARD ENTRY menu appears. c. Scroll to one of the following options (OFF, ON, or ADMIN PROTECT), and press the

key to select it:

• OFF: Disables manual card entry.

• ON: Enables manual card entry without mandatory POS Admin card swipe.

• ADMIN PROTECT: Enables manual card entry with mandatory POS Admin card swipe.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 89

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.7 Configuring Tip Entry - Debit/Credit

From the READY screen OR the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1.

Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2.

Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3.

Scroll down to GENERAL PARAMS, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Scroll down to TIP ENTRY, and press the key.

The TIP ENTRY menu appears.

5. Depending on your requirements, do one of the following:

To disable the Tip Entry prompt: a. Scroll down to NO TIP, and press the key. b. Continue at step 6.

To enable the Tip Entry prompt: a. Scroll down to the card type (DEBIT only or DEBIT & CREDIT), select the one for which the Tip Entry prompt should appear, and press the key.

The TIP ENTRY menu appears listing three Tip prompt formats. b. Scroll to a Tip Entry format (TIP BY AMOUNT or TIP BY PERCENT or TIP

BY $ AND %), and press the key.

Note:

To see how Tip Entry formats affect debit/credit Tip prompting

, refer to the

"Tip Prompt Formats" table.

The TIP ENTRY menu appears. c. Continue at step 6.

6. Press the key repeatedly to return to the READY screen.

90 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.7.1 Tip Prompt Formats

Tip

Prompt

Format

What Happens During a debit/credit

Purchase

TIP BY

AMOUNT

The cardholder will be prompted to enter the Tip as a dollar amount only. (The cardholder may press the this prompt.)

key to bypass entering a Tip during

Actual Tip Prompt/Screen

TIP BY

PERCENT

The cardholder will be prompted to enter a Tip as a percentage value only. (The cardholder may press the this prompt.)

key to bypass entering a Tip during

Note:

If the Tip Percentage

parameter is set as a value greater than zero, the value will appear beside the percent sign (e.g., 15%) during Tip prompting.

TIP BY $

AND %

The cardholder will be prompted to enter the Tip as a percentage value or as a dollar amount. (The cardholder may press the key to bypass entering a Tip during one of the following prompts.)

Note: If the

Tip Percentage

parameter is set to a value greater than zero, the cardholder will be prompted to enter the default value (AA%), or they may select OTHER and then enter their own percentage value or dollar amount.

Note: If the Tip percentage parameter is set to zero, the cardholder will automatically be prompted to choose to whether to enter their own

Tip as a percentage value or dollar amount.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 91

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.8 Configuring Clerk Subtotals

To configure the terminal to perform Clerk Subtotalling:

Note: If you have more than one terminal, you must configure Clerk Subtotalling on each terminal individually.

1. Enable Clerk Subtotalling .

2. Configure the ENTER CLERK ID prompt .

3. Identify the Clerk ID Entry Method .

4. Allow clerks to "zero" clerk totals

.

IMPORTANT:

Clerk Subtotals must be cleared manually (by performing a Clerk

Subtotals Report ) on a regular basis (weekly is recommended). If not, the Moneris Host

will automatically clear the totals when the number of transactions for a card type within a Clerk ID reaches 10,000.

5. Add Clerk IDs

.

6. If you are using a Default Clerk ID,

enable the Default Clerk ID

.

You can now perform Clerk Subtotalling on your terminal.

4.8.1 Allow Clerks to Zero Totals

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK TOTALS, and press the key.

The MERCHANT ID entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card .

4. Key in your Merchant ID, and press the key.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu appears.

5. Scroll down to CLERK ZERO TTL, and press the key.

The CAN CLERK ZERO TOTALS? prompt appears.

6. Press the

key (YES) to display the Zero Clerk Totals? prompt during the Clerk

Subtotals Inquiry . This allows terminal operators to reset the totals for their Clerk ID to zero.

OR

Press the

key (NO) to skip the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt during the Clerk

Subtotals Inquiry .

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu reappears.

7. Press the key repeatedly until the READY screen reappears.

92 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.8.2 Identify Clerk ID Entry Method

You must identify the method that will be used to enter the Clerk ID during transactions.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK TOTALS, and press the key.

The MERCHANT ID entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card .

4. Key in your Merchant ID, and press the key.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu appears.

5. Scroll down to CLERK ENTRY, and press the key.

6. Select the method for entering the Clerk ID at the ENTER CLERK ID entry screen.

- Select SWIPE/MANUAL to allow the use of Clerk ID cards and manually keyed in Clerk

IDs

OR

- Scroll down and select MANUAL if only manually entered Clerk IDs will be used

OR

- Scroll down and select SWIPE if only Clerk ID cards will be used. You must now

identify the location

of the Clerk ID on the card stripe.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu reappears.

7. Press the key repeatedly until the READY screen reappears.

4.8.3 Adding Clerk IDs (including the Default Clerk ID)

Use this function to add the Clerk IDs to be associated with your Merchant ID. The terminal must communicate with the Moneris Host in order to complete this function.

The Clerk IDs you enter here can be entered at the ENTER CLERK ID entry screen during transactions and will be used in Clerk Subtotals Reporting.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK MAINT, and press the key.

The CLRK MAINTCE(## PEND) menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

Note: (## PEND) indicates the number of Clerk IDs waiting to be processed.

4. Press the key to select ADD.

The ENTER CLERK ID TO BE ADDED entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Clerk ID, and press the key. (Min. 1, max. 6 characters. Any combination of numbers and letters. Refer to "

Entering alphabetic character and punctuation

".)

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 93

4 Configuring Your Terminal

.

The CLRK MAINTCE(## PEND) menu reappears.

To continue to add Clerk IDs, repeat steps 4 and 5.

You can add a maximum of 20 Clerk IDs at one time.

Once 20 Clerk IDs have been added, the terminal communicates with the Moneris

Host to add the Clerk IDs to the Host.

When all the Clerk IDs have been added:

6. Scroll down to FINISHED, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host to add the Clerk IDs to the Host then returns to the READY screen.

4.8.4 Removing Clerk IDs

Use this function to remove Clerk IDs associated with your Merchant ID. The terminal must communicate with the Moneris Host in order to complete this function.

The Clerk IDs you remove here can no longer be entered at the ENTER CLERK ID entry screen during transactions and cannot be used in Clerk Subtotals Reporting.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK MAINT, and press the key.

The CLRK MAINTCE(## PEND) menu appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

Note: (## PEND) indicates the number of Clerk IDs waiting to be processed.

4. Scroll down to REMOVE, and press the key.

The ENTER CLERK ID TO BE REMOVED entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Clerk ID, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ")

Min. 1, max. 6 characters. Any combination of numbers and letters.

The CLRK MAINTCE(## PEND) menu reappears.

To continue removing Clerk IDs, repeat steps 4 and 5.

You can remove a maximum of 20 Clerk IDs at one time.

Once 20 Clerk IDs have been removed, the terminal communicates with the Moneris

Host to remove the Clerk IDs from the Host.

When all the Clerk IDs have been removed:

6. Scroll down to FINISHED, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host to remove the Clerk IDs from the Host then returns to the READY screen.

94 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.8.5 Enabling Clerk Subtotalling

From the READY screen:

1. Pressthe key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK TOTALS, and press the key.

The MERCHANT ID entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Key in your Merchant ID, and press the key.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu appears.

5. Select CLERK SUBTTL.

The ENABLE CLERK SUBTOTALLING prompt appears.

6. Press the key (YES) to enable Clerk Subtotalling.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu reappears.

7. Press the key repeatedly until the READY screen reappears.

4.8.6 Enabling the Clerk ID Prompt

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK TOTALS, and press the key.

The MERCHANT ID entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card .

4. Key in your Merchant ID, and press the key.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu appears.

5. Scroll down to PROMPT CLERK, and press the key.

The PROMPT FOR CLERK ID? prompt appears.

6. Press the key (Yes) to enable the Clerk ID prompt for all transactions.

Note: If you are using a Default Clerk ID, you must press the key (NO) to disable this prompt.

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu reappears.

7. Press the key repeatedly until the READY screen reappears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 95

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.8.7 Enabling the Default Clerk ID

The Clerk ID prompt

must be disabled.

You must add the Default Clerk ID to the terminal before enabling it.

The ENTER CLERK ID entry screen will not appear during transactions when the Default

Clerk ID is enabled.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the

key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to DEFAULT CLERK, and press the key.

The ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Key in the Clerk ID to be used as the default, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

".)

The READY screen reappears.

4.8.8 Identifying the Clerk ID Location

From the CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu: a. Select DATA LOCATION. b. Select the location:

Note: This information is provided by the card manufacturer.

TRACK 1

TRACK 2 (This is the default selection.)

NAME

The CLERK SUBTTL CFG menu reappears.

4.9 Configuring Multi-terminal Reporting

You must perform this configuration on every terminal you wish to include in the Multi-

Terminal Report

. This configuration enables Multi-Terminal Reporting and assigns a terminal name

to the terminal.

4.9.1 Enabling Multi-Terminal Reporting

From the READY screen:

Note: The terminal must be registered

to a communications base and

logged on

before you perform this configuration.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

96 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM CFG, and press the key.

The MULTIPLE TERM TRANSACTION? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

4. Press the key to select YES.

The MERCHANT TERMINAL NAME entry screen appears.

5. Key in the terminal name

(max. 6 characters) and press the key. (Refer to

Entering

Alphabetic Characters )

The ALLOW CLOSE BY ADMIN 99? prompt appears.

6. If you wish to:

- use the

Multi-Terminal Report function to remotely close the batch for this terminal, press

the key to select YES.

- use only the Close Batch transaction to close the batch on this terminal, press the key to select NO.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then returns to the READY screen.

4.9.2 Disabling Multi-terminal Reporting

Follow steps 1 through 5 above. At step 6, press the key to select NO. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then returns to the READY screen.

The terminal can no longer be closed from another terminal and cannot close other terminals.

4.9.3 Changing the Terminal Name

Use this function to assign a different terminal name to a terminal that has Multi-Terminal

Report enabled on it.

From the READY screen:

Note: The terminal must be logged on before performing this configuration.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM CFG, and press the key.

The MULTIPLE TERM TRANSACTION? entry screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key to select YES.

The MERCHANT TERMINAL NAME entry screen appears with the existing terminal name displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen.

5. Press the key to clear the existing terminal name.

6. Key in the new terminal name (max. 6 characters) and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering Alphabetic Character and Punctuation

".)

The ALLOW CLOSE BY ADMIN 99? prompt appears.

7. If you wish to:

- use the

Multi-Terminal Report function to remotely close the batch for this terminal, press

the key to select YES.

- use only the Close Batch function to close the batch on this terminal, press the key to select NO.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 97

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.9.4 Deleting the Terminal Name

To delete a terminal name, simply disable the Multi-terminal Report function on the terminal.

Note: Once the terminal name is deleted, the terminal can no longer be closed using the

Multi-Terminal Report function.

From the READY screen:

Note: The terminal must be logged on before performing this configuration.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM CFG, and press the key.

The MULTIPLE TERM TRANSACTION? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key to select NO.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then returns to the READY screen.

The terminal name has now been removed from the Moneris Host and the terminal can no

longer be closed using the Multi-terminal Report

function.

4.10 Configuring Cheque Authorization

The terminal does not require additional configuration in order to process Cheque

Authorizations. However, before performing Cheque Authorizations you must:

• contact Moneris to obtain a list of Cheque Authorization service providers.

• contact a Cheque Authorization service and arrange for service from them.

• notify Moneris that you will be using this service to ensure that your terminal's initialization parameters are updated on the Moneris Host.

re-initialize your terminal

If the Cheque Authorization service requires the entry of a province code for Cheque

Authorizations using a drivers' licence, you may wish to configure a default province code to

avoid having to enter it each time.

98 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

4 Configuring Your Terminal

4.11 Initialization

This function sends information about the terminal to the Moneris Host and receives additional parameters and information from the Host. If you are setting up your terminal for

the first time, follow the First Initialization

instructions below.

From time to time, the Moneris Merchant Service Centre may ask you to re-initialize your terminal if changes have been made to your terminal or your merchant account. Follow the

Re-initialization instructions below.

The handheld terminal does not need to be sitting on a base during initialization; however, it is recommended.

4.11.1 First Initialization

This function MUST be performed once, after completing configuration, in order to use your terminal to process transactions.

Note: Before attempting this transaction, ensure that the1) The

Communications parameters

have been configured 2)The terminal has been

registered to a communications base.

From the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Press the key to select INITIALIZATION.

The MERCHANT ID entry screen appears.

4. Key in your Moneris Merchant ID, and press the key.

The PHONE NUMBER entry screen appears.

5. If you are using dial communication as default or as backup for Ethernet communication:

Key in the Initialization Phone Number, and press the key. OR If you are using Ethernet communication without dial backup: Simply press the key..

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. This may take a few minutes.t

If the CLEAR TERMINAL STORAGE?

prompt appears, press the key to select YES.

6. The PLEASE LOGON

prompt appears.

4.11.2 Re-initialization

The Moneris Merchant Service Centre may ask you to re-initialize your terminal from time to time.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to CONFIGURATION, and press the key.

The CONFIG FUNCS menu appears.

3. Press the key to select INITIALIZATION.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears instead, swipe the POS Admin card.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 99

4 Configuring Your Terminal

If the RETAIN CURRENT MERCH SETTINGS? prompt appears, press the key to select YES.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT select NO unless instructed to do so by a Moneris Service

Centre representative.

If the MERCHANT ID entry screen appears, press the key.

If the PHONE NUMBER entry screen appears, press the key.

4. Please wait while the terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. This may take a few minutes.

The CLEAR TERMINAL STORAGE?

prompt appears.

5. Press the key to select NO.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT select YES unless instructed to do so by a Moneris Service

Centre representative. Selecting YES will erase all the transaction information from the terminal memory.

The PLEASE LOGON

prompt appears.

4.12 Restore Factory Defaults

IMPORTANT: Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

This function returns the terminal’s parameters to the original factory settings.

4.13 Remote Code Download

IMPORTANT: Do NOT use this function unless directed to do so by the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre.

100 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

A financial transaction involves the transfer of funds between a cardholder's account and your own business account. For example, a credit Purchase transaction moves funds from the credit cardholder's account to your business account. A debit Refund transaction moves funds from your business account to the debit cardholder's chequing or savings account.

The Moneris iWL220 point-of-sale terminal can process a variety of financial transactions on cards including debit cards, magnetic stripe credit cards, chip cards, private label credit cards and purchasing/corporate cards.

IMPORTANT: It is the merchant’s responsibility to ensure that proper card processing procedures are followed at all times. Please refer to your Merchant manuals and the

Terms & Conditions of your Merchant Agreement for details .

5.1 Payment Types

5.1.1 Credit Transactions

The terminal processes the following credit card transactions:

Purchase

Purchase-Void

Refund

Refund-Void

Pre-Authorization

Pre-Auth Advice

Force Post (Advice-Voice Authorization)

Private Label Payment

Private Label Payment-Void

Note: All transactions may also be processed as Mail Order/Telephone Order

transactions.

The terminal can process the following types of credit cards:

• Standard credit cards (e.g., MasterCard, Visa, AMEX and others depending on the services for which you are registered).

Corporate (purchasing) cards if you are already processing the same standard

card. For example, if you can process VISA cards, you can also process VISA

Corporate cards. Refer to "Corporate Card Purchase" for detailed instructions.

Private label cards . These require additional agreements with Moneris and a

private label provider depending on the card(s) you wish to process.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 101

5 Financial Transactions

5.1.2 Debit Transactions

The terminal processes the following transactions for debit:

Note: Some debit chip cards may be used to process these transactions as Mail

Order/Telephone Order

transactions.

Purchase

Purchase-Void (Purchase Correction)

Refund

Refund-Void (Refund Correction)

• Some debit chip cards may also be used to process:

- Pre-Authorization

- Pre-Auth Advice

- Force Post (Advice-Voice Authorization)

- Private Label Payment

- Private Label Payment-Void

5.1.2.1 To process a Debit Transaction:

• the cardholder swipes their card through the magnetic stripe reader or inserts their card into the chip reader on the terminal

• the debit cardholder MUST key in their own PIN (Personal Identification number) on the terminal.

IMPORTANT: For security reasons, please respect the cardholder's privacy while they enter their PIN and encourage them to protect their PIN.

5.2 Card Programs

Depending on the card issuer, a payment card may incorporate Chip and/or Stripe and/or

Contactless functionality. The card entry method at the POS (see below) determines which functionality is used and how the card interfaces with the terminal.

5.2.1 Card Entry at the POS

To use

Chip functionality

:

When the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD (or SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD) prompt displays, you or the customer insert the card into the terminal chip reader. (For more information about using chip cards, refer to "Using a Chip Card.")

To use

Stripe functionality

:

When the SWIPE CARD (or SWIPE OR INSERT CARD or SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD) prompt displays, swipe the card on the terminal’s magnetic stripe reader. (For more information about using stripe cards, refer to "The Magnetic Stripe Reader on the Terminal.")

Note: If the terminal is chip enabled, the card must be inserted into the chip reader.

To use

Contactless functionality

:

When the SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD prompt appears, the customer taps or waves their

102 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

card over the terminal display screen. (For more information about contactless cards, refer to

"Using a Contactless Card")

To use

Manual Card Entry

:

If all available Card Entry methods fail, you may manually enter the card number for credit cards and some debit chip cards: When SWIPE CARD or SWIPE OR INSERT CARD or

SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD displays, key in the card number, and press the key. (For more information about manual card entry, refer to "Manual Card Entry.")

5.3 Transaction Flows

To reduce the number of times the terminal is handed to the cardholder for their input (e.g.

Tip amount entry, PIN entry, etc.), the terminal begins at the ENTER AMOUNT entry screen.

To begin a credit, debit or chip Purchase transaction simply key in the dollar amount, and then swipe the credit or debit card, or insert the chip card, or tap the contactless card. The terminal can determine the card type (i.e., debit, credit, or chip) from the information on the card's magnetic stripe or chip.

5.4 Transaction Guidelines

To process financial transactions, you will follow these general guidelines:

1. Determine the transaction to be processed (e.g., Purchase or Refund).

Note: Test wireless communications

to ensure that signal strength is sufficient.

2. Establish the means of payment, i.e., credit

or debit

.

3. Enter the

card data on the terminal

(refer to “Card Entry at the POS.”)

4. Follow the terminal prompts. (Refer to individual financial transaction procedures).*

5. Process receipts

.

* These variables affect which transaction prompts you and the cardholder will see:

- Terminal and merchant setup.

- Transaction type (e.g., Purchase or Refund).

-

Card Program

(i.e., stripe, contactless, or chip).

-

Card Entry method at the POS (e.g., swipe, insert, tap, or manually enter).

- Payment type (i.e., credit or debit)

1

1

Some debit cards may initiate Cashback and/or Tip, and/or Account & PIN prompting after the terminal has been returned to you, which means you will have to hand the terminal back to the cardholder.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 103

5 Financial Transactions

5.5 Credit and Debit Transactions

5.5.1 Purchase

Note:

- The cardholder may be prompted for input under the following circumstances: 1) If a chip

card is used; 2) If a debit card is swiped or inserted; or 3) If Tip Entry

or Cashback

is enabled.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

From the READY screen

:

1. Key in the amount of the Purchase, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

Note: If contactless functionality is enabled, the SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD prompt appears.

2. Enter the card as follows:

swipe insert

tap

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER

LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the

Card number, and press the

key. b. Continue below at step 3. a. You or the cardholder must insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT:

Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

b. Continue below at step 3. a. The cardholder taps (or waves) their card over the terminal's internal contactless reader

(i.e., the display screen).

The terminal beeps. b. Continue below at step 3. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the

key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS

Admin card .

If

MAIL/TEL options appear, refer

to the "Transaction with MOTO

Enabled" procedure.

If the

TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT

OF CARD AND PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Taking a

Manual Imprint of a Card" procedure. c. Continue below at step 3.

3. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction; follow the prompt that appears:

If the CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE prompt appears, refer to the

“Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

104 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

If the ENTER PROMO CODE

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo

Code" procedure.

If the ENTER INVOICE NO

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

If the ENTER XXX AMOUNT entry screen appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST),

refer to the "Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

If an APPROVED message appears, go to step 4.

Note: For some debit cards, the CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE

prompt may appear again. If this happens, simply hand the terminal back the cardholder, who may then be prompted to select a Cashback amount, key in a Tip, select a debit account, or key in their PIN.

4. When an APPROVED message appears (see list below), process any receipts that are printed . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

Note: If REMOVE CARD appears in any message, you or the cardholder must remove the card from the chip reader.

APPROVED ###### OBTAIN SIGNATURE

APPROVED ###### REMOVE CARD

APPROVED ###### GIVE CUST COPY

APPROVED ######

5.5.2 Purchase-Void

This transaction (also known as a Purchase Correction) is used only when a Purchase transaction was entered incorrectly and needs to be cancelled.

IMPORTANT: This transaction must be processed for the full amount of the original

Purchase, and it must be processed in the same batch as the original Purchase.

Note:

- If a debit card is used, the cardholder may be prompted to select an Account and enter a PIN.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to VOID-PURCHASE, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the POS Admin card .

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the Purchase to be voided, and press the key.

IMPORTANT: This transaction must be processed for the full amount of the original

Purchase.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 105

5 Financial Transactions

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

6. Enter the card as follows:

swipe insert

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the

key.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. b. Key in the Auth # found on the

Purchase receipt, and press the

key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an

Original Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

c. Continue below at step 7. a. You or the cardholder must

insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

If the

SELECT <Application name> prompt appears, refer to

the "Selecting the Chip Card

Application" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. b. Key in the Auth # found on the

Purchase receipt, and press the

key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an

Original Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

c. Continue below at step 7. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS

Admin card .

If

MAIL/TEL options appear, refer

to the "Transaction with MOTO

Enabled" procedure.

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT

OF CARD AND PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the

"Taking a Manual Imprint of a

Card" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. c. Key in the Auth # found on the

Purchase receipt, and press the

key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an Original

Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

d. Continue below at step 8.

7. One of the following prompts may appear:

If CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE

appears, refer to the “Cardholder

Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

8. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction. Some of the prompts listed below may appear :

If

ENTER PROMO CODE appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo Code"

procedure.

If

ENTER INVOICE NO appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice Number"

procedure.

If

ENTER XXX AMOUNT appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST), refer to the

"Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

9. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, and then one of the following

APPROVED messages appears depending on the Card Entry method or Payment type:

106 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

If APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

If APPROVED ###### GIVE CUST COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

10.

Process receipts . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

5.5.3 Refund

Credit: Use this transaction to credit a cardholder's account for all or a portion of a previous credit Purchase (e.g., when they return merchandise).

Debit: Use this transaction to return money to a cardholder's account for a portion of the previous debit Purchase (e.g., when they return merchandise).

Note:

- If a debit card is swiped or inserted, the cardholder may be prompted to select an Account and enter a PIN.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REFUND, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the POS Admin card .

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the Purchase to be refunded, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

Note: If contactless functionality is enabled, the SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD prompt appears.

6. Enter the card as follows:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 107

5 Financial Transactions

swipe insert

tap

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4

DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last

4 digits of the Card number, and press the

key.

If the ENTER

ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears, key in the Auth # found on the Purchase receipt, and press the

key. b. Continue below at step 7. a. You or the cardholder must insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

If the

SELECT

<Application name>

prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the

Chip Card

Application" procedure.

If the ENTER

ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION

# entry screen appears, key in the

Auth # found on the

Purchase receipt, and press the key. b. Continue below at step 7. a. The cardholder taps

(or waves) their card over the terminal's internal contactless reader (i.e., the display screen).

The terminal beeps.

The ENTER

ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. b. Key in the Auth # found on the Purchase receipt, and press the

key. c. Continue below at step 8. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS

Admin card .

If MAIL/TEL

options appear, refer to the "Transaction with

MOTO Enabled" procedure.

If the

TAKE MANUAL

IMPRINT OF CARD AND

PRESS OK prompt appears,

refer to the "Taking a Manual

Imprint of a Card" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. c. Key in the Auth # found on the

Purchase receipt, and press the

key. d. Continue below at step 8.

7. One of the following prompts may appear:

If CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE

appears, refer to the “Cardholder

Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

8. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction. Some of the prompts listed below may appear :

If

ENTER PROMO CODE appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo Code"

procedure.

If

ENTER INVOICE NO appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice Number"

procedure.

If

ENTER XXX AMOUNT appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST), refer to the

"Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

9. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, and then one of the following

APPROVED messages appears depending on the Card Entry method or Payment type:

If APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

If APPROVED ###### GIVE CUST COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

10.

Process receipts . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

108 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

5.5.4 Refund-Void

This transaction (also known as a Refund Correction) is used only when a Refund transaction was entered incorrectly and needs to be cancelled.

IMPORTANT: This transaction must be processed for the full amount of the original

Refund, and it must be processed in the same batch as the original Refund.

Note:

- If a debit card is used, the cardholder may be prompted to select an Account and enter a PIN.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to VOID-REFUND, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the POS Admin card .

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the Refund to be voided, and press the key.

IMPORTANT: This transaction must be processed for the full amount of the original

Refund.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

6. Enter the card as follows:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 109

5 Financial Transactions

swipe insert

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. b. Key in the Auth # found on the

Refund receipt, and press the

key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an Original

Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

c. Continue below at step 7. a. You or the cardholder must insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

If the

SELECT <Application name> prompt appears, refer

to the "Selecting the Chip

Card Application" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. b. Key in the Auth # found on the Refund receipt, and press the

key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an

Original Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

c. Continue below at step 7. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the

key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD

prompt appears, swipe the POS

Admin card

.

If

MAIL/TEL

options appear, refer to the "Transaction with MOTO

Enabled" procedure.

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT

OF CARD AND PRESS OK prompt

appears, refer to the "Taking a

Manual Imprint of a Card" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears. c. Key in the Auth # found on the

Refund receipt, and press the key.

IMPORTANT: Enter an Original

Authorization number that exists in the current Batch.

d. Continue below at step 8.

7. One of the following prompts may appear:

If CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE

appears, refer to the “Cardholder

Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

8. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction. Some of the prompts listed below may appear :

If

ENTER PROMO CODE appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo Code"

procedure.

If

ENTER INVOICE NO appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice Number"

procedure.

If

ENTER XXX AMOUNT appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST), refer to the

"Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

9. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, and then one of the following

APPROVED messages appears depending on the Card Entry method or Payment type:

If APPROVED ###### OBTAIN SIGNATURE appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

If APPROVED ###### GIVE CUST COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

110 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

10.

Process receipts . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

A Pre-Authorization transaction starts the purchase process by confirming that the Preauthorization amount is available on the card and then placing a hold on that amount. This is useful if the final amount of the transaction is not known. Once the final amount of the

Purchase transaction is known, an Advice transaction MUST be performed to complete the

Purchase process and transfer those funds to your business account.

Note: If you processed a Pre-Authorization transaction and no longer need to complete it (e.g. the cardholder chose another method of payment when the final amount was known) you can remove the Pre-Auth from the terminal memory by deleting or cancelling it to ensure that it is not completed accidentally.

5.5.5 Pre-Authorizations

Pre-Authorization transactions are commonly used in hotel, restaurant and car rental environments where the final amount of the sale is unknown when the card is first swiped. In

these service-based environments, the Pre-Authorization transaction is often set as the default

transaction started from the READY screen.

Note: Pre-Authorizations can only be performed using chip functionality if the

CHIP CARD

PRE-AUTH

parameter is set to YES on the terminal.

You can process a Pre-Authorization from the (Purchase default)

READY screen

.

OR

You can process a Pre-Authorization

from the (Pre-Auth default) READY screen

.

5.5.6 Pre-Auth Completion (Advice)

If

Tip Reporting

is enabled, you can:

- Complete or cancel the Pre-Auth from an

Advice List .

If Tip Reporting is disabled, you can:

- Complete or cancel the transaction by using the Pre-Auth's Original Sequence number .

- Delete the transaction by performing a

Transaction Inquiry .

5.5.7 Pre-Authorizations and Completions (Advices)

5.5.7.1 Pre-Authorization

Note:

- If a chip card is used, the cardholder may be prompted to enter a PIN.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

- Some debit chip cards may be used for this transaction.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PRE-AUTH., and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 111

5 Financial Transactions

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

4. Key in the amount of the Pre-Auth, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

5. Enter the card as follows:

swipe insert

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the key. b. Continue below at step 6. a. You or the cardholder must insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

b. Continue below at step 6. a. Key in the Card number, and press the

key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the

key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card .

If

MAIL/TEL options appear, refer to

the "Transaction with MOTO

Enabled" procedure.

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT

OF CARD AND PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Taking a Manual

Imprint of a Card" procedure. c. Continue below at step 6.

6. One of the following prompts may appear:

If the CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE prompt appears, refer to the

“Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

7. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction. Some of the prompts listed below may appear:

If the

ENTER PROMO CODE entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo

Code" procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

8. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, and then one of the following

APPROVED messages appears depending on the Card Entry method:

If APPROVED ###### OBTAIN SIGNATURE appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

If APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

9. Process receipts

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

Note: You must perform a Pre-Auth Advice transaction (using the sequence number or the

Advice List ) to complete this transaction, or alternatively you may use the Advice List to

112 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

delete or cancel the transaction. You may also delete the Pre-Auth by performing a

Transaction Inquiry .

Note: If the Pre-Auth is cancelled, the hold on the cardholder's funds is immediately released.

If the Pre-Auth is deleted, the hold is NOT immediately released.

Note: The Pre-Auth Advice must be performed on the same handheld terminal as the original

Pre-Authorization transaction.

5.5.7.2 Pre-Authorization as Default

Note:

- If a chip card is used, the cardholder may be prompted to enter a PIN.

- If a

Private label credit card is used, you may be prompted to enter a Promo code.

- Some debit chip cards may be used for this transaction.

From the (PRE-AUTH) READY screen :

1. Key in the amount of the Pre-Auth, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

2. Enter the card as follows:

swipe insert

manually enter

(credit and some debit chip cards) a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4

DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the

key. b. Continue below at step 3. a. You or the cardholder must insert the card into the terminal chip reader.

IMPORTANT: Leave the chip card in the reader for the entire transaction.

b. Continue below at step 3. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the

key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD

prompt appears, swipe the POS

Admin card.

If MAIL/TEL

options appear, refer to the "Transaction with MOTO

Enabled" procedure.

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT

OF CARD AND PRESS OK prompt

appears, refer to the "Taking a

Manual Imprint of a Card" procedure. c. Continue below at step 3.

3. One of the following prompts may appear:

If the CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE prompt appears, refer to the

“Cardholder Prompts: Debit/Credit” procedure.

4. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 113

5 Financial Transactions

If the

ENTER PROMO CODE entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo

Code" procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

5. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, and then one of the following

APPROVED messages appears depending on the Card Entry method:

If APPROVED ###### OBTAIN SIGNATURE appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

If APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key. A receipt prints.

6. Process receipts

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

Note: You must perform a Pre-Auth Advice transaction (using the sequence number or the

Advice List ) to complete this transaction, or alternatively you may use the Advice List to

delete the transaction. You may also delete the Pre-Auth by performing a

Transaction

Inquiry

.

5.5.7.3 Advice - with Pre-Authorization Sequence Number

Note:

- This transaction may be used to cancel a Pre-Auth and immediately release the hold on the cardholder's funds.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card was used for the original Pre-Auth, you may be

prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card was used for the original Pre-Auth, you may be prompted to

enter a Promo code.

From the READY screen:

IMPORTANT: The Advice must be performed on the same handheld terminal as the original Pre-Authorization transaction in order to find the original Pre-Auth transaction in the terminal memory.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to P-A ADVICE, and press the key.

The FIND ORIGINAL TRANSACTION? prompt appears.

Note: If you do not have the Pre-Authorization receipt available, you must

use the Card number to find the Pre-Authorization transaction.

4. Press the key (YES).

The ENTER ORIGINAL SEQUENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

5. Key in the 6-digit

Original Sequence number

(refer to "Finding the Sequence Number") found on the Pre-Authorization receipt, and press the key.

The last 16 digits of the Card number are displayed.

6. Compare to the Card number on the Pre-Authorization receipt.

If they match, press the key.

Note: If they do NOT match, press the key and retry the transaction.

7. One of the prompts listed below may appear:

114 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

If the ENTER ORIGINAL AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

Original Amount and Tip" procedure.

If the ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears, do one of the following:

If the amount displayed is the final amount of the transaction, simply press the

key.

OR

If the amount has changed (e.g., because a Tip has been added), key in the final amount of the transaction, and press the key. OR

To cancel the Pre-Auth and release the hold on the cardholder's funds, press the

key (inputs a $0.00 dollar value), and press the key.

8. The following prompts may appear :

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

If

MAIL/TEL options appear, refer to the "Transaction with MOTO Enabled"

procedure.

If the

ENTER PROMO CODE entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo

Code" procedure.

If the

ENTER XXX AMOUNT entry screen appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST),

refer to the "Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

9. When APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key.

10. Process receipts . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

5.5.7.4 Advice - Using Pre-Authorization Advice List

This menu shows a list of all Pre-Auth transactions that have not yet been completed. From this menu, you may select and then complete, delete, or cancel Pre-Auth transactions.

IMPORTANT: The Advice must be performed on the same handheld terminal as the original Pre-Authorization transaction in order to find the original Pre-Auth transaction in the terminal memory.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to P-A ADVICE LST, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. To view unmasked card numbers, swipe your

POS Admin card

; otherwise, to view masked card numbers, simply press the key.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 115

5 Financial Transactions

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, key in a Clerk ID to use as a selection

criterion. (Refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID" procedure.) OR Simply press the

key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in a specific amount for which to search, and press the key. OR Simply press the

key.

The DATE entry screen appears.

6. Key in either a specific 4-digit date (MM/DD) or a 6-digit date (YY/MM/DD) for which to search, and press the key.

OR Simply press the key.

The BATCH NUMBER entry screen appears.

7. Key in a Batch number (1 to 3 digits long) for which to search, and press the

key.

OR Simply press the key.

THE P-A ADVICE LIST menu appears listing all uncompleted Pre-Auth transactions.

P-A ADVICE LIST

PA0000 $999.99

PA0000 $999.99

PA0000 $999.99

0000 = last four digits of the Card number

8. Press the key to scroll down the list of uncompleted Pre-Authorization transactions

(press the key to scroll up), and then press the key at your selection.

9. When the prompt to complete (COMPL) or delete (DELETE) the transaction appears, do one of the following:

To complete the transaction:

To cancel the transaction: To delete the transaction:

a. Press the key

(COMPL).

The ENTER

ORIGINAL AMOUNT screen appears. b.

Enter the transaction amount

. (Refer to the

"Entering Original

Amount and Tip" procedure.) c. Wait while the terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. d. Continue at step 10.

Note: Cancelling the transaction immediately releases the hold placed on the cardholder's funds.

a. Press the key

(COMPL).

The ENTER ORIGINAL

AMOUNT screen appears. b. Press the key

(automatically enters a

$0.00) amount, and press the key. c. Wait while the terminal communicates with the

Moneris Host. d. Continue at step 10.

Note: Deleting the Pre-Auth

DOES NOT immediately release the hold placed on the cardholder's funds.

a. Press the key

(DELETE).

b. Continue

in the "Deleting a Pre-Auth from the Pre-

Authorization Advice List" procedure.

10. When APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key.

11.

Process receipts . (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

If the TRANSACTION NOT FOUND message appears, press the key to return to the READY screen.

116 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

If the P-A ADVICE LIST menu appears but you wish to return to the READY screen, press the key twice.

If the P-A Advice LIST menu appears and you wish to complete another Pre-Auth, refer back to

step 8 .

5.5.7.5 Advice - with Voice Authorization Number

Use this transaction to complete a Purchase transaction performed using an imprinter and a

Paper Sales Draft when the terminal was down.

Note: This transaction is also known as a Force Post transaction.

- If a

Corporate (purchasing) credit card was used for the original Pre-Auth, you may be

prompted to enter Tax data.

- If a

Private label credit card was used for the original Pre-Auth, you may be prompted to

enter a Promo code.

- Some debit chip cards may be used for this transaction.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to P-A ADVICE, and press the key.

The FIND ORIGINAL TRANSACTION? prompt appears.

4. Press the key to select NO.

If the ENTER ORIGINAL AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

Original Amount and Tip" procedure.

If the ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears, key in the total amount found on the

Paper Sales Draft, and press the key.

If the ENTER CLERK ID

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID" procedure.

If the ENTER INVOICE NO

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

5. When the ENTER ORIGINAL AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears, key in the

Voice-authorized number (max 8 digits) written on the Paper Sales Draft, and press the

key.

The ENTER CARD NUMBER entry screen appears.

6. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears.

7. Key in the Expiry date, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card .

If MAIL/TEL

options appear, refer to the "Transaction with MOTO Enabled" procedure.

If the ENTER PROMO CODE

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Promo

Code" procedure.

If the ENTER INVOICE NO

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 117

5 Financial Transactions

If the ENTER XXX AMOUNT entry screen appears (XXX is the tax type, e.g. GST),

refer to the "Entering Reporting Data for Transaction with Purchasing Card" procedure.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

8. When APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key.

9. Process receipts

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

5.5.8 Manually Processing Transactions

In order to process credit (and some debit chip) Purchase and Refund transactions manually you must have a Paper Sales Draft for the card type (e.g. a VISA Sales Draft for a Purchase

on a VISA card) and an imprinter. Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre

to obtain these supplies if you do not have them.

Use one of the following procedures to complete a Purchase or Refund transaction when the terminal is down:

Note: Floor limits are established by Moneris. Contact your Moneris account manager for more information.

5.5.9 Manually Processing Transactions UNDER Floor Limit

If the terminal is down, report the problem to Moneris then follow these instructions to process the transaction manually.

Note: In order to process credit (and some debit chip) Purchases and Refunds manually you must have a Paper Sales Draft for the card type (e.g. a VISA Sales Draft for a Purchase on a

VISA card) and an imprinter. Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre

to obtain these supplies if you do not have them.

While the terminal is down:

1. Take an imprint of the customer's card.

When the terminal is functioning properly again:

2. Process a

Purchase

or Refund

transaction on the terminal for the amount on the Paper Sales

Draft. You will need to key in the Card number and Expiry date.

3. Attach the Merchant copy of the terminal's receipt to the Merchant copy of the Paper Sales

Draft, and retain the two copies for your records.

5.5.10 Manually Processing Transactions OVER Floor Limit

If the terminal is down, report the problem to Moneris then follow these instructions to process the transaction manually.

Note: In order to process credit (and some debit chip) Purchases manually you must have a paper Sales Draft for the card type (e.g. a VISA Sales Draft for a Purchase on a VISA card) and an imprinter.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre to obtain these supplies if you

do not have them.

While the terminal is down:

1. Take an imprint of the customer's card.

a. Call the Moneris Voice Authorization number

to obtain a Voice Authorization number for the transaction and record the Voice Authorization number on the Paper

Sales Draft.

When the terminal is functioning properly again:

118 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

2. Process a

Pre-Auth Advice

transaction on the terminal for the amount on the Sales Draft.

You will need to key in the Card number, Expiry date and Voice Authorization number.

3. Attach the Merchant copy of the terminal's receipt to the Merchant copy of the Sales Draft and retain the two copies for your records.

5.5.11 Private Label Transactions

All standard financial transactions can be processed using a private label card. For example, a private label card Purchase transaction follows the same steps as a regular credit Purchase with one possible additional step: a prompt to enter a

Promo code may appear.

There are two transactions that can only be performed using a Private label card:

Payment

Payment Void

5.5.11.1 Private Label Payment

This transaction allows a cardholder to make a payment towards the balance on their private label credit card.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PAYMENT, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

4. Key in the amount the cardholder wishes to pay towards the balance owing.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The SWIPE CARD prompt appears.

5. Enter the card as follows:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 119

5 Financial Transactions

swipe

manually enter

a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. b. Continue below at step 6. a. Key in the Card number, and press the key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card .

If the

TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF CARD AND

PRESS OK prompt appears, refer to the "Taking a

Manual Imprint of a Card" procedure.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. c. Continue below at step 6.

6. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction. The prompts listed below in this step may appear:

If APPROVED ###### OBTAIN SIGNATURE appears, press the key. A receipt prints. Continue at step 7.

If APPROVED ###### appears, press the key. Continue at step 7.

7. Process receipts

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

5.5.11.2 Private Label Payment-Void

This transaction reverses a Private Label Payment transaction made in error. It may also be referred to as a Payment Correction transaction.

IMPORTANT: This transaction must be processed for the full amount of the original

Payment transaction and it must be processed in the same batch as the original Payment transaction.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to VOID-PAYMENT, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

4. Key in the amount of the original Payment, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER INVOICE NO entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Invoice

Number" procedure.

The ENTER ORIGINAL AUTHORIZATION # entry screen appears.

5. Key in the 6-digit AUTH # found on the Payment receipt, and press the key.

The SWIPE CARD prompt appears.

120 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

6. Enter the card on the terminal:

swipe

manually enter

a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the key. b. Continue below at step 7. a. Key in the Card number, and press the

key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears,

swipe the POS Admin card

.

If the TAKE MANUAL IMPRINT OF CARD

AND PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the

"Taking a Manual Imprint of a Card" procedure. c. Continue below at step 7.

7. Please wait while the terminal processes the transaction.

8. When APPROVED ###### MERCHANT COPY appears, press the key.

A receipt prints.

9. Process receipts

. (Refer to the "Receipt Processing" procedure.)

5.6 Cheque Authorization Transactions

5.6.1 Cheque Authorization

This feature allows you to give your customers the option of paying with a cheque while reducing your risk of accepting an NSF cheque. Use the terminal to connect to a cheque authorization service and obtain approval based on the identification your customer provides.

The customer's driver’s licence

or credit card can be used as identification for this transaction.

5.6.2 Cheque Authorization with a Credit Card

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CHEQUE AUTH, and press the key.

The CHEQUE AUTHORIZATION menu appears.

4. Scroll down to CREDIT CARD, and press the key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the cheque, and press the key.

The SWIPE CARD prompt appears.

6. Enter the card as follows:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 121

5 Financial Transactions

swipe

manually enter

a. Swipe the card on the terminal.

If the ENTER LAST 4 DIGITS entry screen appears, key in the last 4 digits of the Card number, and press the key. b. Continue below. a. Key in the Card number, and press the

key.

The ENTER EXPIRY DATE entry screen appears. b. Key in the Expiry date, and press the

key. c. Continue below.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

7. Record the APPROVED number on the back of the cheque.

Note: A receipt is NOT printed for Cheque Authorizations.

8. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

5.6.3 Cheque Authorization with a Driver's Licence

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Press the key to select TRANSACTIONS.

The TRANSACTIONS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CHEQUE AUTH, and press the key.

The CHEQUE AUTHORIZATION menu appears.

4. Scroll to DRIVERS LICNCE, and press the key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the cheque, and press the key.

The ENTER DRIVERS LICENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

6. Key in the Driver's Licence number, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

".)

The ENTER PROVINCE OR STATE CODE entry screen appears.

7. Key in the 2-character code

for the province or state in which the licence was issued, and press the key.

Note: If you have

configured a default Province code and the code is correct for this

transaction, simply press the key.

The ENTER BIRTH DATE (YYMMDD) entry screen appears.

8. Key in the Birth date found on the driver's licence, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

9. Record the APPROVED number on the back of the cheque.

Note: A receipt is NOT printed for Cheque Authorizations.

10. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

122 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

5 Financial Transactions

5.6.4 Province or State Code

This code is used to identify the province or state that issued the driver's licence.

A list of codes is provided by the cheque authorization service provider.

A

default Province or State code

can be configured to speed up the Cheque Authorization transaction.

5.7 Receipt Processing

If Merchant and/or Cardholder receipts print after a transaction has been submitted, follow these recommended procedures to process the receipts:

1. Receipts may not print in the order presented below:

Note: Receipts always print for contactless debit transactions; however, neither a Signature line nor a statement (i.e., NO SIGNATURE REQUIRED or VERIFIED BY PIN) will be printed.

If the Merchant copy prints: a. Tear it off, and press the key.

If a TIP line prints on this copy, you or the cardholder write in the Tip amount if any.

If a TOTAL line prints on this copy, you or the cardholder write in the final amount to be charged to the card (include the Tip amount if any).

If a Signature line prints on this copy, have the cardholder sign it.

If NO SIGNATURE REQUIRED

prints on this copy, do not obtain the cardholder's signature.

If VERIFIED BY PIN

prints on this copy, do not obtain the cardholder's signature. b. Retain this copy for your records.

If the Cardholder copy prints: a. Tear it off, and press the key.

If a TIP line prints on this copy, follow the same instructions as for the Merchant copy.

If a TOTAL line prints on this copy, follow the same instructions as for the Merchant copy.

If a Signature line prints on this copy, sign it. b. Give this copy to the cardholder.

If no receipts print, continue at step 2.

2. The prompts listed below may appear; otherwise, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

If UPDATE POINTS TO ANOTHER CARD?

appears, refer to the "Starting a Loyalty

Card Transaction" procedure.

If USE LOYALTY INFO FROM PRE-AUTH?

appears, refer to the "Starting a Loyalty

Card Transaction from a Pre-Auth Completion Transaction" procedure.

If the FIND ORIGINAL TRANSACTION? prompt appears, complete or cancel another

Pre-Auth, or press the key twice to return to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 123

5 Financial Transactions

If the P-A ADVICE LIST menu re-appears, complete or cancel another Pre-Auth, or press the key to return to the READY screen.

If TRANSACTION NOT FOUND appears, press the key to return to the READY screen.

124 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.1 Gift/Loyalty Programs

The Moneris Gift/Loyalty program allows you to offer your customers two electronic cardbased programs that are activated and processed through the iWl220 terminal:

Gift Cards : allows you to offer your customers stored-value gift cards for pre-defined

dollar values as well as variable-value cards and rechargeable cards.

Loyalty Points : allows you to reward customer loyalty by awarding points based on

the dollar value of Purchases a cardholder makes.

To enable a gift/loyalty program on your terminal:

1. Contact Moneris Solutions.

2. Enable Ernex

on the terminal.

3. Initialize

the terminal to the Moneris Host.

IMPORTANT: If you process more than one card plan with Moneris, maintain a list of the card names along with the first 14-character card description that will be displayed on the terminal screen during step 6 of the

Transaction Inquiry

report. This will allow the terminal operator to easily identify which card plan description to select.

4. If you wish to enable Tip Prompting (gift Purchases only):

a. Enable the gift/loyalty Tip Entry

parameter.

b. If you wish to define a default the Tip Percentage, configure the gift/loyalty Tip

Percentage

parameter.

6.2 The Moneris Gift Card Program

The Moneris Gift Card program allows you to offer your customers stored-value gift cards for pre-defined dollar values as well as variable-value cards and reloadable cards.

Gift Card Transactions

Purchase

Refund

Activate/Reload

Deactivate

Card Inquiry

Void

Reprint

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 125

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

Gift Reports

Clerk Inquiry on Transactions

Close Batch

Help List

Configuration Parameters List

Stored Transactions

Transaction Inquiry

Open Batch Totals

Tip Totals

6.2.1 Configuring Tip Entry for Gift

Enabling Tip Entry gives your customers the option to enter a Tip on the terminal during a gift Purchase transaction. (Tip entry is generally used in service-based industries.)

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to SETUP, and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

4. Scroll up to TIP ENTRY, and press the key.

The ENABLE TIP? prompt appears.

5. Press the key (YES) to enable Tip prompting. OR Press the key (NO) to disable

Tip prompting.

The SETUP menu appears.

6. Press the key repeatedly to return to the READY screen.

Optional: To preset a default Tip Percentage

, refer to the "Configuring the Tip Percentage

for Gift" procedure.

6.2.2 Configuring the Tip Percentage for Gift

Defining a default Tip Percentage gives your customers the option to select your default Tip percentage to calculate the Tip amount during gift Purchases.

Note: For this feature to work,

Tip Entry for Gift must be enabled.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to SETUP, and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

126 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

4. Scroll up to TIP PERCENTAGE, and press the key.

The ENTER TIP PERCENTAGE entry screen appears.

Note:

-To see how defining the gift Tip Percentage affects Tip prompting

, refer to the "Gift Tip

Prompt Formats" table.

5. Key in the desired default percentage value, and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

6. Press the key repeatedly to return to the READY screen.

6.2.2.1 Gift Tip Prompt Formats

Tip

Percentage value

greater than zero

What Happens During a Gift Purchase

The cardholder will be prompted to enter the default value (AA%), or they may select OTHER and then enter their own percentage value or dollar amount.

Actual Tip Prompt/Screen on Terminal

zero The cardholder will automatically be prompted to enter their own Tip as a percentage value or as a dollar amount.

6.2.3 Gift Card Transactions

6.2.3.1 Activate a Gift Card

This transaction activates a Moneris gift and allows the card to be used as payment for

Purchases.

IMPORTANT: To control usage of new gift cards, activate them ONLY at the time they are purchased (e.g., do not activate a batch of cards ahead of time.) Gift cards are essentially cash once they are activated.

This transaction can also add an additional dollar value to gift cards that can be reloaded after they are activated.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to ACTIVATE/LOAD, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the gift card on the terminal.

The ENTER CVC entry screen appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 127

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

5. Key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Activation

Amount" procedure.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The PROCESSING message appears, and then the APPROVED ACTIVATE NEXT? prompt appears.

6. To activate/load another card, press the key (YES). OR To continue without activating another card, press the key (NO).

7. Do one of the following:

If you pressed the key (YES): a. The Cardholder copy prints, which you give to the customer. b. Press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

c. Go back to step 4

.

If you pressed the

key (NO), and the BALANCE DUE $#.## PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the Balance Due Payment Method" procedure.

If you pressed the key (NO), and "Approved" appears: a. Press the key.

The Merchant copy prints, which you retain. b. Press the key.

The Cardholder copy prints, which you retain. c. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.2.3.2 Deactivate a Gift Card

Deactivating a gift card renders the card unusable. This should be done when a card is lost, stolen or demagnetized in order to stop unauthorized use. The terminal will print a receipt with the last available balance on the card.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to DEACTIVATE, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

128 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

4. Key in the gift card number, and press the key.

OR If the gift card is available, it can be swiped.

The ENTER CVC entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED PRESS OK message appears.

6. Press the key.

If the

TRANSFER BALANCE TO NEW CARD?

prompt appears, refer to the

"Transferring the Balance to a New Gift Card" procedure.

The receipts are printed, and then the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.2.3.3 Gift Card Purchase

Use this transaction when a Moneris gift card is presented as payment. If the Purchase amount is greater than the value on the card, the terminal may prompt for payment of the outstanding amount.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Press the key to select PURCHASE.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the gift card on the terminal, or key in the card number, press the key, and swipe the POS Admin card.

The ENTER CVC entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The ENTER TOTAL AMOUNT entry screen appears.

6. Key in the amount of the Purchase including taxes, and press the key.

If the CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE prompt appears, refer to the

"Cardholder Prompts: Gift" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 129

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

If the " Info Data PRESS OK " prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be

customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED message appears.

If the

BALANCE DUE $#.## PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the

Balance Due Payment Method" procedure.

7. Press the key.

The receipts are printed and the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

8. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.2.3.4 Gift Card Refund

If a Purchase using a Moneris gift card as payment was processed incorrectly, use this transaction to return the value of the Purchase back on to the card.

Note: You must have the original gift Purchase receipt available in order to perform this transaction.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REFUND, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the gift card on the terminal. OR Key in the gift card number, and press the

key.

The ENTER CVC entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The ENTER TOTAL AMOUNT entry screen appears.

6. Key in the total amount of the Purchase including taxes, and press the key.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The ERNEX REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

7. Key in the REF # that appears on the Gift Card Purchase receipt, and press the key.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED message appears.

8. Press the key.

The receipts are printed and the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

9. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

130 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.3 The Moneris Loyalty Program

The Moneris Loyalty Card program allows you to award loyalty points that can be used for rewards. The program for which you are enrolled determines which prompts will appear during transactions. For example, you may have the option to award bonus points during a loyalty Purchase for one program but not another. One program may support auto-

Redemption/coupons while another program supports both auto-Redemption/coupons and manual Redemption transactions.

6.3.1 Loyalty Card Transactions

Purchase

(awards points)

Pre-Authorization

(allocates points)

Pre-Authorization Completion (awards points)

Refund

(removes points)

Redemption

(uses points)

Activate Card

Deactivate Card

Card Inquiry

Void

Reprint

receipt

6.3.2 Loyalty Reports

Clerk Inquiry on Transactions

Close Loyalty Batch

Help List

Configuration Parameters List

Stored Transactions

Transaction Inquiry

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 131

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6.3.3 Loyalty Transactions

6.3.3.1 Activate a Loyalty Card

Activating a loyalty card allows it to be used to earn points.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to ACTIVATE/LOAD, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the loyalty card on the terminal.

OR Key in the Loyalty Card number, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the

ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Activation

Amount" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The PROCESSING message appears, and then the APPROVED ACTIVATE NEXT? prompt appears.

5. To activate/load another card, press the key (YES). OR To continue without activating another card, press the key (NO).

6. Do one of the following:

If you pressed the key (YES): a. The Cardholder copy prints, which you give to the customer. b. Press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

c. Go back to step 4

.

If you pressed the

key (NO), and the BALANCE DUE $#.## PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the Balance Due Payment Method" procedure.

If you pressed the key (NO), and "Approved" appears: a. Press the key.

The Merchant copy prints, which you retain. b. Press the key.

The Cardholder copy prints, which you retain. c. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

132 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.3.3.2 Deactivate a Loyalty Card

Deactivating a loyalty renders the card unusable. The card can no longer be used to accumulate points.

This should be done when a Loyalty card is lost, stolen or demagnetized in order to stop unauthorized use. The terminal will print a receipt with the last available points balance on the card.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to DEACTIVATE, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Key in the loyalty card number, and press the key.

OR Swipe the Loyalty Card on the terminal.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED PRESS OK message appears.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.3.3.3 Redemption

This transaction allows a loyalty cardholder to purchase items using the points on their loyalty card.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REDEMPTION, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the loyalty card on the terminal.

OR Key in the loyalty card number, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 133

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

One of the following Redemption prompts may appear:

If the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Dollars/Points to be Redeemed PRESS OK"), press the key.

If the ENTER AMOUNT

entry screen appears (dollars redemption), refer to the

"Entering the Redemption Amount" procedure.

If the ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS entry screen appears (points redemption),

refer to the "Entering the Number of Points" procedure.

The PROCESSING message appears.

If the

BALANCE DUE $#.## PRESS OK

prompt appears, refer to the "Selecting the

Balance Due Payment Method" procedure.

The APPROVED message appears, and then the first receipt prints.

5. Press the key to print the next receipt.

6. Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.3.3.4 Loyalty Card Purchase

This transaction adds points to a loyalty card based on the Purchase amount.

Most loyalty card transactions are started

automatically at the end of a debit or credit transaction ; however, they can also be started through the Ernex menus.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Press the key to select PURCHASE.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the Loyalty Card on the terminal.

OR Key in the Loyalty Card number, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The ENTER TOTAL AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the amount of the Purchase including taxes (or leave the amount at $0.00 to process a coupon), and press the key.

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

One of the following Benefit prompts/entry screens may appear depending on your loyalty program's configuration:

If the "Pre-Tax Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears, press the key.

134 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

If the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Food Amount PRESS OK" or "Amount PRESS

OK").

If the ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

the Benefit Amount" procedure.

The PROCESSING message appears, and then APPROVED appears while the first receipt prints.

6. Press the key to print the next receipt.

7. Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu.

8. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.3.3.5 Starting a Loyalty Card Transaction from a Pre-Authorization Transaction

a. Swipe the loyalty card or key in the card number:

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

One of the following Benefit prompts/entry screens may appear depending on your loyalty program's configuration:

If the "Pre-Tax Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears, press the key.

If the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Food Amount PRESS OK" or "Amount PRESS

OK").

If the ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

the Benefit Amount" procedure.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED message appears while the first receipt prints. b. Press the key to print the next receipt. c. Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu. d. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.3.3.6 Starting a Loyalty Card Transaction from a Pre-Auth Completion Transaction

When the USE LOYALTY INFO FROM PRE-AUTH? prompt appears: a. To complete the loyalty transaction using the data keyed in during the Pre-Auth transaction, press the key to select YES.

OR

To key in different data for the loyalty transaction, press the key to select NO.

Note: If the credit Pre-Auth was cancelled (i.e., the credit Advice was processed for a zero dollar amount), the points allocation for the loyalty Pre-Auth will also be voided.

If the APPLY TO ########## PRESS OK prompt appears, press the key to apply points to the Card number (########) displayed.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 135

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

One of the following Benefit prompts/entry screens may appear depending on your loyalty program's configuration:

If the "Pre-Tax Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears, press the key.

If the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Food Amount PRESS OK" or "Amount PRESS

OK"), refer to the "Customized Prompt for Benefit Amount Example" procedure.

If the ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

the Benefit Amount" procedure.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED message appears while the first receipt prints. b. Press the key to print the next receipt. c. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

If the P-A ADVICE LIST menu re-appears, complete another Pre-Auth Advice, or press the

key to return to the READY Screen.

If the TRANSACTION NOT FOUND message displays, press the key to return to the

READY Screen.

6.3.3.7 Loyalty Card Refund

If a loyalty Purchase was processed incorrectly, use this transaction to remove the incorrectly assigned points from the loyalty card.

Most loyalty card transactions are started automatically at the end of a debit or credit transaction , however they can also be started through the Ernex menus.

Note: You must have the original loyalty Purchase receipt available in order to perform this transaction.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the

key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REFUND, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the loyalty card on the terminal.

OR Key in the loyalty card number, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The ENTER TOTAL AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the total amount of the Purchase including taxes, and press the key.

136 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

If the " Info Data PRESS OK

" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Tracking Code PRESS OK"), refer to the "Entering Optional

Information" procedure.

If the " Bonus Code PRESS OK

" prompt appears, refer to the "Entering the Bonus

Code" procedure.

One of the following Benefit prompts/entry screens may appear depending on your loyalty program's configuration:

If the "Pre-Tax Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears, press the key.

If the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears (prompt text is variable, e.g., it could be customized to display "Food Amount PRESS OK" or "Amount PRESS

OK").

If the ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering

the Benefit Amount" procedure.

The ERNEX REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

6. Key in the REF # that appears on the loyalty card Purchase receipt, and press the key.

The PROCESSING prompt appears then the APPROVED message appears while the first receipt prints.

7. Press the key to return to print the next receipt.

8. Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu.

9. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.4 Gift/Loyalty Procedures

6.4.1 Reprinting Gift/Loyalty Receipts

Use this function to print a duplicate cardholder or Merchant copy of the most recently printed gift/loyalty receipt.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPRINT, and press the key.

The REPRINT menu appears.

To print a duplicate of the:

- Merchant Copy of the gift/loyalty receipt, press the key to select MRCHANT.

- Cardholder Copy of the gift/loyalty receipt, press the key to select CUSTOMER.

The PRINTING message appears while a duplicate of the most recently printed receipt is printed.

4. The terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 137

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6.4.2 Starting a Loyalty Card Transaction from a Financial Transaction

The Moneris loyalty application can be started automatically at the end of a financial transaction (debit/credit) as well as

through the Ernex menus .

When the UPDATE POINTS TO ANOTHER CARD? prompt appears: a. To complete the financial transaction without starting a Loyalty card transaction, press the key to select NO.

IMPORTANT: If this prompt appears at the end of a Pre-Auth Advice for a

Voice Authorized transaction

, you MUST select NO.

The terminal returns to the READY screen.

OR

To start a Loyalty transaction using an loyalty card, press the key to select YES.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears. b. If the financial card was swiped, swipe the loyalty card.

If the financial card number was keyed in (e.g. for a MOTO transaction

), key in the loyalty card number, and press the key.

Go to the appropriate loyalty transaction and continue from the SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt.

If you completed a financial

(debit/credit): this loyalty transaction will begin:

Purchase

Refund

Purchase-Void

Refund-Void

Pre-Auth

Pre-Auth Advice

loyalty Purchase

(step 4)

loyalty Refund

(step 4)

loyalty Void (step 4) loyalty Void (step 4)

loyalty Pre-Auth loyalty Pre-Auth Advice

6.4.3 Transferring the Balance to a New Gift Card

There was a balance remaining on the deactivated Gift Card.

Note: If you transfer the balance, the new gift card MUST be one that can be activated for a variable amount (i.e., NOT a fixed value card).

When the TRANSFER BALANCE TO NEW CARD? prompt appears:

To transfer the remaining balance to a new gift card: a. Press the key to select YES.

The terminal automatically begins an Activation transaction (start at step 4).

To simply deactivate the card and cash-out or remove the remaining balance: a. Press the key to select NO.

The READY screen appears.

138 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.4.4 Selecting the Balance Due Payment Method

The BALANCE DUE prompt appears in four transactions:

• A gift card activation for which the customer must pay for the card

• A gift card Purchase for which the dollar value on the card is less than the Purchase amount.

• A loyalty card activation for which the cardholder can pay to have points put on the card balance

• A loyalty card redemption for which the amount to be redeemed is greater than the amount on the card.

When the BALANCE DUE $#.## PRESS OK prompt appears:

1. Press the key.

The BALANCE DUE PAY WITH prompt appears.

2. Select a payment method:

To enter a debit card or credit card, press the key (CR/DB).

OR

To enter another gift card (already activated and loaded), press the

OR

To accept payment with cash, press the

key (CASH).

key (GIFT).

3. Depending on the number of Activation/Loads processed, do one of the following:

If a single Activation/Load or gift Purchase or loyalty Redemption was processed, and:

If CR/DB was selected: a. The Merchant copy prints, which you retain.

If multiple Activations/Loads were processed, and:

b. Press the

key. c. The Cardholder copy prints, which you give to the customer. d. Press the key.

The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD (or

SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD) prompt appears. e. Continue the transaction in "Purchase" at

step 2

.

If GIFT was selected: a. The Merchant copy prints, which you retain.

If CR/DB was selected: a. The Activation Summary report prints (which you retain), and the

SWIPE OR INSERT CARD (or

SWIPE/INSERT/TAP CARD) prompt appears. b. Continue the transaction in

"Purchase" at

step 2 .

If GIFT was selected: a. The Activation Summary report prints (which you retain), and the

SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears. b. Continue the transaction in "Gift

Card Purchase" at step 4 .

b. Press the key. c. The Cardholder copy prints, which you give to the customer.

If CASH was selected: a. The Activation Summary report prints (which you retain), and the

ERNEX menu appears. d. Press the

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

key. b. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 139

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

e. Continue the transaction in "Gift Card

Purchase" at

step 4 .

If CASH was selected: a. The Merchant copy prints, which you retain. b. Press the key. c. The Cardholder copy prints, which you give to the customer. d Press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears. e. Press the key to return to the

READY screen.

6.4.5 Entering the Optional Information

The default text of the optional information prompt is "Info Data PRESS OK"; however, the

Moneris Host may send a customized prompt (e.g., "Tracking Code PRESS OK"). If this prompt has been customized, see the

Customized Prompt Example

below.

When the "Info Data PRESS OK" prompt appears:

1. Press the key.

The ENTER DATA entry screen appears.

2. Key in the required information, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".)

OR

If data is displayed and you want to accept that data, press the key. To change it, simply key in the new information then press the key.

Continue the transaction.

Customized Prompt Example

If the Info prompt has been customized to display the "Tracking Code" prompt, then:

When the "Tracking Code PRESS OK" prompt appears:

1. Press the key.

The ENTER DATA entry screen appears.

2. Key in the tracking code, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation

".)

Continue the transaction.

140 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.4.6 Entering the Activation Amount

When the ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears: a. Key in the dollar amount (gift) or points (loyalty) to be made available on the card, and press the key.

Go back to the Activation transaction.

6.4.7 Entering the Benefit Amount

The default text of this optional prompt is ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT; however, the

Moneris Host may send a customized prompt.If this prompt has been customized, see the

Customized Prompt Example below.

1. When the ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears: for loyalty

Purchase: for loyalty Refund: Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be deducted, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be deducted is the same as the total dollar amount of the Refund, press the

key. for loyalty Pre-

Authorization:

Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be awarded is the same as the total dollar amount of the Purchase, press the

key.

Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be awarded is the same as the total dollar amount of the Pre-Auth, press the

key.

Note: Points are not actually awarded until the loyalty Pre-

Auth is completed. for loyalty Pre-Auth

Completion:

If the Pre-Auth amount has changed, key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the Pre-Auth amount has not changed, press the key to award points based on the currently displayed dollar amount (which excludes tax and tip).

2. Continue the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 141

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

Customized Prompt for Benefit Amount Example

Note: The following is an example of a customized Benefit prompt.

If the Benefit prompt has been configured to display a customized prompt (e.g., "Food

Amount PRESS OK"), then when the "Food Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears:

1. Press the key.

The ENTER BENEFIT AMOUNT entry screen appears.

2. Key in the dollar amount of the food purchased excluding tax and tip, and press the

key. This amount will be used to calculate the number of points (i.e., the benefit).

Note: For examples of what to enter per transaction type, refer to the table in the preceding

" Entering the Benefit Amount " procedure.

3. Continue the transaction.

6.4.8 Entering the Number of Points for a Redemption

The default text of this optional prompt is ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS, however the

Moneris Host may send a customized prompt. If this prompt has been customized, see the

Customized Prompt Example below.

When the ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS entry screen appears: a. Key in the number of points to be deducted from the card to pay for the goods/services, and press the key.

Go back to the

Redemption transaction.

Customized Prompt for Redemption Points Example

If this prompt has been customized, e.g. "Redemption Points PRESS OK" appears, an additional prompt appears:

Note: The following is an example of a customized Benefit prompt.

When the "Redemption Points PRESS OK" prompt appears: a. Press the key.

The ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS entry screen appears. b. Key in the number of points to be deducted from the card to pay for the goods/services, and press the key.

Go back to the

Redemption transaction.

142 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.4.9 Entering the Redemption Amount

The default text of this optional prompt is ENTER AMOUNT; however, the Moneris Host

may send a customized prompt. If this prompt has been customized, see the Customized

Prompt Example

below.

When the ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears: a. Key in the dollar amount (key in $0.00 to process coupons) that will be used to calculate the number of points to be deducted from the card to pay for the goods/services, and press the

key.

Go back to the

Redemption transaction.

Customized Prompt for Redemption Amount Example

If this prompt has been customized, e.g. "Dollars Redeemed PRESS OK" appears, an additional prompt appears:

When the "Dollars Redeemed PRESS OK" prompt appears: a. Press the key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears. b. Key in the dollar amount to be deducted (as points) from the card (or key in $0.00 to process coupons), and press the key.

Go back to the

Redemption transaction.

6.4.10 Entering the Bonus Code

When the "Bonus Code PRESS OK" prompt appears:

Note: The configuration of your loyalty program determines whether or not this prompt will appear during a transaction.

1. Press the key.

The ENTER DATA entry screen appears.

2. Depending on the loyalty transaction being processed, do one of the following: for loyalty Activation:

Press the key. for loyalty

Deactivation:

Press the key. for loyalty Redemption:

Press the key. for loyalty Purchase: To award Bonus points, key in the appropriate Bonus code, and press the key.

OR

To bypass awarding Bonus points, simply press the key without entering a value.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 143

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

for loyalty Refund: To remove Bonus points, key in the Bonus code that is printed on the original loyalty Purchase receipt, and press the key.

OR

To leave the Bonus points on the card, simply press the

key without entering a value. for loyalty Pre-Auth: To award Bonus points, key in the appropriate Bonus code, and press the key.

OR

To bypass awarding Bonus points, simply press the key without entering a value.

Note: Bonus points are awarded when the Pre-Auth is completed. for loyalty Pre-Auth

Completion:

To award the Pre-Auth Bonus points, press the key without entering a value. (This awards the Bonus points printed on the loyalty Pre-Auth receipt.)

OR

To award a different number of Bonus points, key in the appropriate Bonus code, and press the key.

3. Continue the transaction procedure.

6.4.11 Entering the Pre-Tax Amount

When the "Pre-Tax Amount PRESS OK" prompt appears:

Note: The configuration of your loyalty program determines whether or not this prompt will appear during a transaction.

1. Press the key.

The ENTER DATA entry screen appears.

2. Depending on the loyalty transaction being processed, do one of the following: for loyalty Purchase: Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be awarded is the same as the total dollar amount of the Purchase, press the

key. for loyalty Refund: Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be deducted, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be deducted is the same as the total dollar amount of the Refund, just press the

key.

144 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

for loyalty Pre-

Authorization:

Key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are to be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the amount for which points are to be awarded is the same as the total dollar amount of the Pre-Auth, press the

key.

Note: Points are not actually awarded until the loyalty Pre-

Auth is completed. for loyalty Pre-Auth

Completion:

If the Pre-Auth amount has changed, key in the dollar amount excluding tax and tip for which regular points are be awarded, and press the key.

OR

If the Pre-Auth amount has not changed, press the key to award points based on the currently displayed dollar amount (which excludes tax and tip).

3. Continue the transaction procedure.

6.4.12 Cardholder Prompts: Gift

1. Follow the prompt that appears:

If CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE appears, pass the terminal to the cardholder, who presses the key.

2. When the PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears, the cardholder presses the key.

If the

ENTER TIP AMOUNT OR PRESS OK AA% OTHER

prompt appears, refer to the "Entering a Tip: Preset Percentage Enabled - Gift" procedure.

If the

ENTER TIP AMOUNT OR PRESS OK % $ prompt appears, refer to the

"Selecting Percentage or Dollar Amount Tipl - Gift" procedure.

3. When the PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears, the cardholder presses the key to accept the displayed amount (includes the Tip if any was entered).

Note: To re-enter a Tip (if entered incorrectly), the cardholder presses the key to go back to the original Tip prompt.

The RETURN TO CLERK prompt appears on the terminal.

4. The cardholder returns the terminal to you.

5. Press the

key to clear the RETURN TO CLERK prompt.

6. Refer back to the " Gift Card Purchase " procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 145

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6.4.12.1 Entering a Tip: Preset Percentage Enabled - Gift

The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To enter the preset Tip

Percentage:

1. The cardholder presses the key (AA%).

The PURCHASE $#.##-

OK? prompt appears

(amount includes the Tip).

2.

Continue

the "Cardholder

Prompts: Gift" procedure.

To enter a different percentage or dollar amount Tip:

1. The cardholder presses the

key (OTHER).

The prompt appears.

2. Continue in the "Selecting

Percentage or Dollar Amount Tip

- Gift" procedure.

To bypass entering a Tip:

1. The cardholder presses the

key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

2.

Continue

the "Cardholder

Prompts: Gift" procedure.

6.4.12.2 Selecting Percentage or Dollar Amount Tip - Gift

The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To select "enter-Tip-aspercentage" option:

1. The cardholder presses the key (%).

The ENTER TIP

PERCENTAGE entry screen appears.

2. Continue in the

"Entering a Percentage

Tip - Gift" procedure.

To select "enter-Tip-asdollar-amount" option:

1. The cardholder presses the

key ($).

The ENTER TIP AMOUNT entry screen appears.

2. Continue

in the "Entering a Dollar Amount Tip - Gift" procedure.

To bypass entering a Tip:

1. The cardholder presses the

key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

2.

Continue the "Cardholder

Prompts: Gift" procedure.

146 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.4.12.3 Entering a Percentage Tip - Gift

The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To enter a percentage Tip:

1. The cardholder keys in a percentage value (replaces displayed value, AA) and presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears (amount includes the Tip).

2.

Continue

the "Cardholder Prompts:

Gift" procedure.

6.4.12.4 Entering a Dollar Amount Tip - Gift

The cardholder follows the terminal prompt shown here:

To bypass entering a Tip:

1. The cardholder keys in 0 (zero), and presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

2. Continue the "Cardholder Prompts:

Gift" procedure.

To enter a dollar amount Tip:

1. The cardholder keys in a dollar amount and presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears (amount includes the Tip).

2.

Continue

the "Cardholder Prompts:

Gift" procedure.

To bypass entering a Tip:

1. The cardholder presses the key.

The PURCHASE $#.##-OK? prompt appears.

2.

Continue

the "Cardholder Prompts:

Gift" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 147

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6.5 The Menu Feature - Gift/Loyalty

6.5.1 The ERNEX Menu

The ERNEX Menu (see ERNEX below) gives you access to gift and loyalty transactions and sub-menus that allow you to print gift/loyalty reports and set up your terminal to perform gift/loyalty transactions.

The transactions and sub-menus are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

ERNEX

PURCHASE Starts

or loyalty Purchase

REFUND Starts

loyalty Refund

REDEMPTION Starts

ACTIVATE/LOAD Starts

or loyalty card Activation

DEACTIVATE Starts

or loyalty Card Deactivation

CARD INQUIRY

Starts a gift/loyalty card Balance Inquiry

REPRINT Starts function

REPORT FUNCS

Opens the gift/loyalty REPORT FUNCTIONS

menu

SETUP Opens menu

To access the ERNEX menu, from the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

148 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.5.2 The Gift/Loyalty SETUP Menu

The gift/loyalty Configuration menu (see SETUP below) contains a list of parameters that can be enabled and configured on the iWL220 terminal.

IMPORTANT: The Gift/Loyalty program requires an additional agreement between the merchant and Moneris Solutions. Please ensure that the necessary agreements are in place before attempting to configure those programs on the terminal.

The parameters are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until another feature is enabled.

SETUP

INITIALIZATION

Initializes the terminal with Moneris Gift/Loyalty enabled to the Moneris Host

GENERAL PARAMS Sets the format of the date printed on gift/loyalty receipts.

Press the key to select DATE FORMAT.

The DATE FORMAT menu appears.

Select the date format, and press the key.

The GENERAL PARAMETERS menu reappears.

PRINTER CONFIG

ENABLE ERNEX

DISABLE ERNEX

Press the key to return to the Ernex SETUP menu.

Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu.

Sets up the Ernex voucher messages printed on the gift/loyalty receipts.

Press the key to select VOUCHER HEADER.

The

VOUCHER HEADER menu appears.

Allows the terminal to process gift/loyalty card transactions.

(Default = YES)

The ENABLE ERNEX? prompt appears.

To allow the terminal to process gift/loyalty card transactions, press the key.

The SETUP menu reappears.

Stops the terminal from processing gift/loyalty transactions.

(Default = YES)

The DISABLE ERNEX? prompt appears.

To stop the terminal from processing gift/loyalty card transactions, press the key.

The SETUP menu reappears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 149

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

PAYMENT APPL

ROUTING CODE

Allows the terminal to process debit and credit card transactions.

The PAYMENT APPL ENABLED? prompt appears.

To allow the terminal to process debit and credit card transactions, press the key.

The SETUP menu reappears.

Directs the gift/loyalty transactions within the Moneris Host.

The ENTER ERNEX ROUTING CODE entry screen appears.

To accept the default code, press the key.

To change the default code, key in the 2-digit routing code provided by Moneris, and press the key.

The SETUP menu reappears.

COMMUNICATION Tests the communication link between the terminal and the

Moneris Host

The terminal begins to communicate with the Moneris

Host to test the connection.

If the test is successful, the COMMUNICATION

WITH ERNEX OK message appears.

TIP ENTRY

Press the key to return to the ERNEX menu.

Enables Tip prompting during gift Purchase transactions.

TIP PERCENTAGE

Configures default percentage value by which the Tip amount

may be calculated for gift Purchases. Tip Entry for gift cards

(see above) must be enabled.

To access the gift/loyalty SETUP menu, from the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to SETUP and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

150 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.5.3 The Gift/Loyalty VOUCHER HEADER Menu

The terminal can be configured to print vouchers on gift/loyalty receipts. Use this menu to set up the gift and loyalty voucher-related messages printed on the gift/loyalty receipts.

The text can be bold, double height and double width., i.e. more than one format can be applied to the voucher text.

VOUCHER HEADER

ENABLED Turn vouchers off or on

Press the key to select YES, press the key to select NO.

BOLD

DOUBLE HEIGHT

DOUBLE WIDTH

INITIAL TEXT print the voucher in bold text

Press the key to select YES, press the key to select NO. print the voucher in text that is 2 lines high

Press the key to select YES, press the key to select NO. print the voucher in text that is 2 characters wide

Press the key to select YES, press the key to select NO.

If you have changed a pre-programmed voucher header, use this menu item to reset the voucher header to the original pre-programmed text.

Press the key to select YES, press the key to select NO.

HDR ENGLISH

To use the displayed text, press the key.

To change the text, begin keying in the new text (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".) and press the

key.

HDR FRENCH?

To use the displayed text, press the key.

To change the text, begin keying in the new text (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".) and press the

key.

Press the key to return to the gift/loyalty PRINTER CFG menu.

Press the key to return to the gift/loyalty

SETUP menu .

To access the Ernex VOUCHER HEADER menu, from the

READY screen :

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to SETUP and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 151

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

4. Scroll down to PRINTER CONFIG and press the key.

The PRINTER CFG menu appears.

5. Press the key to select VOUCHER HEADER.

The VOUCHER HEADER menu appears.

6.5.4 The Gift/Loyalty REPORT FUNCTIONS Menu

This menu allows you to produce a variety of reports on gift/loyalty transactions and perform a close batch to the Moneris Host.

The reports are listed in the order they appear on the menu.

Allows you to print:

REPORT

FUNCTIONS

CLOSE BATCH

Close the current gift/loyalty batch on the Moneris Host and print a

Batch Totals report of all gift/loyalty transactions.

OPEN BATCH TOT

TRANS LIST

Retrieve the gift and loyalty card batch totals by gift and loyalty ID that were processed since the last Close Batch request.

TRANS INQUIRY

CLERK INQUIRY

CONFIG LIST

HELP LIST

A list of all gift/loyalty transactions stored in the terminal by date or by batch.

A list of gift/loyalty transactions based on selected criteria and transaction details for individual gift/loyalty transactions.

A report listing totals for a

specific clerk , a

group of clerks or all clerks

.

This item appears only if Clerk Subtotalling

is enabled in the

Moneris (debit/credit) application.

A report listing the current settings for each gift/loyalty parameter.

A list of the gift/loyalty functions and transactions with their

Shortcut codes.

TIP TOTALS

A report listing gift Tip totals.

To access the gift/loyalty Reporting Functions menu, from the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCTIONS menu appears.

152 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.6 Gift/Loyalty Admin Transactions

6.6.1 Gift/Loyalty Card Inquiry

Use this transaction to check the value remaining on the Moneris gift or loyalty card as well as the status (active or deactivated) of the card.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CARD INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the gift/loyalty card on the terminal OR key in the card number and press the

key.

If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host and the PROCESSING prompt appears then the INQUIRY COMPLETE message appears.

5. Press the key.

The CARD BALANCE ##### PRESS OK prompt appears. The card balance is displayed for

20 seconds or until the key is pressed.

6. Press the key.

The PRINT RECEIPT? prompt appears.

7. To print a customer copy of the Card Inquiry receipt, press the key for YES.

Note: This transaction does NOT print a Merchant copy of the receipt.

To return to the ERNEX menu without printing a receipt, press the key for NO.

The ERNEX menu appears.

8. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 153

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6.6.2 Voiding a Gift/Loyalty Transaction

Use this transaction to cancel a gift/loyalty transaction that was started from the

ERNEX menu

. The gift/loyalty transaction that matches the Ernex Reference number entered during this Void transaction will be cancelled.

To cancel loyalty transactions that were started at the end of a financial transaction, you must

start the void transaction at the financial TRANSACTIONS menu .

Gift and loyalty transactions can be cancelled using this transaction including:

Loyalty Transactions

Purchase

Refund

Redemption

Activation

Gift Transactions

Purchase

Refund

Activation/Load

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to VOID, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The SWIPE OR ENTER CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the gift/loyalty card on the terminal

OR Key in the gift/loyalty card number, and press the key.

If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, key in the Card Validation Code (CVC), and press the key.

Note: The CVC is found on the back of the card after the card number. It may be located under a scratch-off panel. If the ENTER CVC entry screen appears, this code must be keyed in to ensure that the card is authentic.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The ERNEX REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears.

5. Key in the REF # that appears on the gift/loyalty card transaction receipt, and press the

key.

The PROCESSING prompt appears, and then the APPROVED PRESS OK prompt appears.

6. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

154 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.6.3 Gift/Loyalty Close Batch

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Press the key to select CLOSE BATCH.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

Note: If this prompt appears, you must enter the Clerk ID even if the Default Clerk

ID feature has been enabled.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, then prints the CURRENT BATCH

TOTALS report, and then returns to the ERNEX menu.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.6.4 Gift/Loyalty Initialization

This function sends information about the terminal to the Moneris Host and receives additional parameters and information from the Host.

This function MUST be performed after completing the set up of the Moneris Gift/Loyalty program in order for you to use your terminal to process gift/loyalty transactions.

From time to time, the Moneris Host may ask you to initialize your terminal again if changes

have been made to your terminal or your merchant account. Follow the Re-initialization

instructions below.

The handheld terminal does not need to be sitting on a base during initialization, however it is recommended.

Note: Before attempting this transaction, ensure that:

- the

communications parameters

have been configured.

- the terminal has been registered

to a communications base.

- the terminal has been initialized

to the Moneris Host

6.6.4.1 First Initialization

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to SETUP, and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

4. Press the key to select INITIALIZATION.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 155

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

The ENTER ERNEX TERMINAL ID entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Ernex Terminal ID (min. 1, max. 8 digits), and press the key.

If the ENTER PHONE NUMBER prompt appears, key in the Ernex phone number and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".)

Note: Acceptable non-digit characters include: P (for pulse line), T (for tone line), *, # and, (comma which causes a dialling pause).

The terminal begins communicating with the Moneris Host.

6. When the initialization to the Moneris Host is complete, the ERNEX menu reappears.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.6.4.2 Reinitialization

From the READY screen:

Note: If ERNEX INITIALIZATION REQUIRED is displayed on the screen, press the

key and start at step 3 of these instructions.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to SETUP, and press the key.

The SETUP menu appears.

4. Press the key to select INITIALIZATION.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The ENTER ERNEX TERMINAL ID entry screen appears.

5. To keep the Ernex Terminal ID displayed on the screen, simply press the key.

To replace the displayed ID, key in a new Ernex Terminal ID (min. 1, max. 8 digits), and press the key.

The terminal begins communicating with the Moneris Host.

6. When the initialization to the Moneris Host is complete, the ERNEX menu reappears.

The CLEAR TERMINAL STORAGE? prompt appears.

7. Press the key (NO).

IMPORTANT: Do NOT select YES unless instructed to do so by a Service

Centre representative. Selecting YES will erase all the transaction information from the terminal memory.

8. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

156 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.7 Gift/Loyalty Reports

6.7.1 Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report after a Financial Report

After the terminal finishes printing a report started from the financial REPORT FUNCS menu, it provides the option of printing the same report for gift/loyalty transactions.

This financial report...

Close Batch

Stored Transactions List

Transaction Inquiry

Clerk Subtotals Inquiry

...prompts for the corresponding gift/loyalty report.

gift/loyalty Close Batch

gift/loyalty Stored Transactions List

gift/loyalty Transaction Inquiry

gift/loyalty Clerk Subtotals Inquiry

Configuration Parameters Report

Help List

gift/loyalty Configuration Parameters List

gift/loyalty Help List

When the PRINT ERNEX REPORT? prompt appears:

To print the same report for gift/loyalty transactions:

Press the key to select YES.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host, prints the report then returns to the READY screen.

Note: You may be prompted to enter criteria for the gift/loyalty report.

To return to the READY screen without printing the report:

Press the key to select NO.

To terminal returns to the READY screen.

Go back to the transaction.

6.7.2 Printing a Stored Transactions Report for Gift/Loyalty Transactions

This report contains information about the gift/loyalty transactions saved in the terminal's memory. It prints only the terminal totals (i.e. the number of gift/loyalty transactions and total dollar and points amounts by card type), or a list of all gift/loyalty transactions in the terminal's memory by date or by batch number followed by the terminal totals.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to TRANS LIST, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 157

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

5. Swipe your POS Admin card , or simply press the

key.

The PRINT DATE OR BATCH? prompt appears.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID

entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID" procedure.

6. Select the sorting method for the report:

To print the transactions that occur on a specific date, press the key (DATE).

To print the transactions that occur in a specific batch, press the key (BATCH).

Note: If you are printing a Transactions List for the End-of-Day procedure, press the key

(BATCH).

7. If you selected the key for Date, key in the date in YYMMDD format.

If you selected the key for Batch, key in the batch number.

OR simply press the key to include all transactions in the terminal memory.

The PRINT TOTALS ONLY? prompt appears.

8. If you wish to print only the totals for each card type on the report, press the key

(YES).

If you wish to print information on each transaction individually as well as totals for the report, press the key (NO).

Note: If you are printing a Transactions List for the End-of-Day procedure, press the key

(YES).

The terminal prints the report then returns to the ERNEX menu.

9. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.7.3 Printing a Gift/Loyalty Open Batch Totals Report

The Open Batch Totals request retrieves the gift and loyalty card batch totals by gift and loyalty ID that were processed since the last Close Batch request.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to OPEN BATCH TOT, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The terminal prints the report then returns to the ERNEX menu.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

158 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.7.4 Gift/Loyalty Transaction Inquiry Report

This report lists all transactions that match the criteria you select. If you do not select any criteria (i.e. you simply press the key as each criteria appears), all transactions in the terminal memory are listed.

Criteria are:

• Clerk ID

• Card type

• Card number

• Amount

• Type of transaction

• Date of transaction

The results can be printed or displayed on the terminal screen.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to TRANS INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

5. Swipe your POS Admin card , or simply press the

key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The criteria appear in order:

6. The CARD TO SEARCH menu appears with a list of card plans, beginning with ALL

CARDS.

To select all card plans, ensure ALL CARDS is highlighted, and press the key.

OR

To select a specific card plan, scroll down the list until the card plan description you wish to select is highlighted, and then press the key.

Note: To determine the correct card plan description, refer to the list of the card names and their corresponding first 14-character card plan description.

7. The CARD NUMBER entry screen appears.

To select all Card numbers, simply press the key.

OR

To select a specific card, key in the card number, and press the key.

8. The AMOUNT entry screen appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 159

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

To select all transactions regardless of amount, simply press the key.

OR

To select transactions of a specific amount, key in the amount, and press the key.

If the TRANS TO SEARCH menu appears.

To select all transaction types including all gift/loyalty, debit and credit types, ensure ALL TRANS is highlighted, and then press the key.

OR

To select a specific debit or credit transaction type (e.g. Void-Refund), select

FINANCL+ERNEX, and press the key.

OR

To select a specific gift/loyalty transaction type (e.g. Redemption), select

ERNEX.

The TRANS TO SEARCH menu appears.

Scroll through the list until the transaction type you wish to select is highlighted, and then press the key.

9. The DATE (YY) MMDD entry screen appears.

To select all transactions regardless of the date they were processed, simply press the

key.

OR

To select transactions processed on a specific date, key in the date in the format indicated on the screen (the 2-digit year is optional), and press the key.

10. The PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears.

To print the list of matching transactions, press the key to select PRINT. The terminal searches its memory for matching transactions then displays PRINTING while the report is printed.

To reprint Merchant Copy of a receipt: a. Press the key to select DISPLAY. b. Scroll to the desired card number/amount, and press the key. c. Press the key to select REPRINT.

The terminal prints the receipt.

11. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.7.5 Clerk Subtotalling on Gift/Loyalty Transactions

This feature allows you to produce Clerk Subtotals reports tracking gift/loyalty totals and the number of gift/loyalty transactions performed using the Clerk Inquiry function.

The Clerk Inquiry function can be performed for

one clerk

, a

group of clerks or all clerks

on one or more terminals.

Totals are calculated according to the Clerk ID entered during a transaction or the default

Clerk ID .

160 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.7.6 Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for All Clerks

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

one clerk

or a group of clerks

.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

5. Press the key (MULTIPLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (YES) to reset the totals for all Clerk IDs to zero.

The MULT CLERKS(00 PEND) menu appears.

6. Scroll down to ALL CLERKS, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints: a. The CLERK SUBTOTALS report for each Clerk ID b. The OVERALL TOTALS report for all Clerk IDs.

When the reports are finished printing, the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.7.7 Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for a Group of Clerks

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

all clerks

or one clerk .

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

5. Press the key (MULTIPLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (YES) to reset the totals for all selected Clerk IDs to zero.

The MULT CLERKS(00 PEND) menu appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 161

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

6. Scroll down to GROUP, and press the key.

The ENTER GROUP ID TO BE PROCESSED entry screen appears.

7. Key in the Group Identifier, and press the key.

The MULT CLERKS(01 PEND) menu appears.

To continue selecting Clerk ID Groups, repeat steps 6 and 7.

When all the Clerk IDs have been added:

8. Scroll down to PROCESS LIST, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host and then prints: a. The CLERK SUBTOTALS report for each Clerk ID that belongs to the Clerk ID

Group b. The OVERALL TOTALS report for the Clerk ID Group.

When the reports are finished printing, the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.7.8 Gift/Loyalty Clerk Subtotals Report for One Clerk

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

all clerks

or a

group of clerks

.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll up to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

5. Press the key (SINGLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (YES) to reset the totals for the Clerk ID to zero.

The ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears.

6. Key in the Clerk ID, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".)

Note: You must enter the Clerk ID even if the Default Clerk ID feature has been enabled.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints the CLERK SUBTOTALS report and returns to the ERNEX menu.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

162 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.7.9 Printing Gift Tip Totals

This report contains a tip summary of gift transactions stored in the data capture for the current or a previous Batch that matches the selection criteria.

Note: If Clerk Sub-totalling is enabled, Tip amounts are summarized by Clerk ID.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to TIP TOTALS, and press the key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

Note: If a Clerk ID is not entered, the totals for all gift Tips will be retrieved.

The PRINT BY DATE OR BATCH? prompt appears.

5. Press the key (for Tip totals by date) or the key (for Tip totals by batch)

If you pressed the key (Tip totals by date)...

The START DATE (YY)MMDD entry screen appears. a. Key in the Start date (the year is optional), and press the key.

Note: The date format is year (YY), month

(MM), and day (DD) (e.g., to enter Dec. 31,

2012, you would key in 121231).

The START TIME [HHMM] menu appears.

If you pressed the key (Tip totals by batch)...

The BATCH NUMBER entry screen appears. a. Key in the Batch number, or leave this field blank (for the current batch), and press the key.

The terminal prints the report and then returns to the ERNEX menu. b. Continue at step 6. b. Key in the Start time, and press the

key.

Note: The time format is hours (HH) and minutes (MM) (e.g., to enter 1:00 AM, you would key in 0100).

The END DATE (YY)MMDD entry screen appears. c. Key in the End date (year is optional), and press the key.

Note: The date format is year (YY), month

(MM), and day (DD) (e.g., to enter Dec. 31,

2012, you would key in 121231).

The END TIME [HHMM] entry screen appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 163

6 The Moneris Gift/Loyalty Programs

d. Key in the End time, and press the

key.

Note: You must enter a valid End time value.

The time format is hours (HH) and minutes

(MM) (e.g., to enter 11:59 PM, you would key in 2359).

The terminal prints the report and then returns to the ERNEX menu. e. Continue at step 6.

6. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

6.7.10 Printing the Gift/Loyalty Configuration Parameters List

When you have finished configuring Gift/Loyalty on your terminal, perform this function in order to have a printed record of the terminal’s gift/loyalty parameters. Included on the printout are:

• Ernex software version number (Ernex Core Version)

• terminal identification information (Ernex Term ID)

• Moneris Merchant ID (Merch ID)

• configuration details for each card type downloaded from the Moneris Host (e.g., card description, whether Refunds are allowed for this card, etc.)

From the READY screen prompt:

Note: This will use quite a bit of paper, especially if there are a number of different gift/loyalty cards configured.

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll down to CONFIG LIST, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report. When the report is finished printing, the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

164 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

6 The Moneris Gift and Loyalty Programs

6.7.11 Printing a Gift/Loyalty Help List

This report lists all the gift/loyalty functions and transactions that are enabled on the terminal

and the corresponding Admin Shortcut Code .

From the READY screen prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ERNEX, and press the key.

The ERNEX menu appears.

3. Scroll down to REPORT FUNCS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

4. Scroll up to HELP LIST, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report. When the reports are finished printing, the terminal returns to the ERNEX menu.

5. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 165

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.1 The Air Miles Rewards Program

The Air Miles rewards program allows you to offer your customers the opportunity to collect miles on a loyalty card based on the dollar value of Purchases they make. Some programs also provide miles based on the purchase of specific items or incentive calculations that can be implemented for a specific time period.

7.1.1 Configuring Air Miles

To enable an Air Miles rewards program on your terminal:

1. Contact Moneris Solutions.

2.

Plan how the program will calculate miles .

3.

Configure Air Miles on your terminal.

4.

Initialize your terminal .

7.1.2 Air Miles Rewards Transactions

Reward Purchase

Reward Refund

7.1.3 Air Miles Rewards Administration

Reprint

the last Air Miles Reward receipt

Rewards Totals Report

Rewards Transactions Report

Rewards SAF Transactions Report

Deleting Rewards SAF Transactions

Completing Rewards

Transactions

• Printing the

Rewards Configuration Report

• Printing the

Help List

of Rewards Transactions and Admin codes

Configuring

the Air Miles Rewards Program

7.2 Configuring the Air Miles Rewards Program

Air Miles rewards are awarded based on the formula you configure on the terminal as a

Reward Program. After you have planned how the program will award miles , the terminal

must be configured to match the formula. This function allows you to configure the terminal to process Air Miles rewards transactions and produce reports on those transactions.

There are six main steps to be completed when configuring the terminal to process Air Miles

Rewards transaction.

1.

Enable the Rewards Program

.

2.

Select the Program Type .

3. Configure the Program:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 167

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

i.

Configure the Calculator and Factors

.

ii.

Configure the Incentive

.

iii.

Set the maximum number of rewards per transaction.

iv. Set the Rewards Totals Reset time of day

.

v.

Enable the Enter Reference Number prompt.

4.

Configure the Bonus Offers if you intend to offer them.

5.

Configure the Tax setup

.

6.

Set the SAF Upload Time Period

.

Note: The default is 5 minutes. If you wish to use this value you do not need to perform this step.

Note: If you wish to use both the Retail and the Wholesale Rewards programs, repeat steps 2 through 6 for each program.

The terminal is ready to process Air Miles Rewards transactions.

Moneris recommends printing an Air Miles Configuration List

to have a record of the

program configuration and an Air Miles Help List

to have a list of transactions available and

their Admin Codes

.

7.2.1 The Air Miles REWARDS SETUP Menu

IMPORTANT: Do NOT attempt to configure your terminal without assistance from the

Moneris Merchant Service Centre.

The Air Miles Rewards configuration menu (see REWARD PROGRAM below) contains a list of parameters that can be enabled and configured on the iWL220 terminal.

IMPORTANT: The Air Miles Rewards program requires an additional agreement between the merchant and Moneris Solutions. Please ensure that the necessary agreements are in place before attempting to configure those programs on the terminal.

The parameters are listed in the order they appear on the menu. Some items may not appear on the terminal until another feature is enabled.

REWARD PROGRAM

ENABLE REWARD

Allows the terminal to process Air Miles Reward card transactions.

(Default = NO)

PROGRAM TYPE

Identifies the Reward program type to be configured and used to calculate the number of Air Miles Reward miles to be assigned.

SAF UPD PERIOD

RETAIL CONFIG

Sets the time period that must pass between the last SAF Upload attempt (automatic or manually prompted) and the next automatic

SAF Upload attempt

Identifies the parameters of the Retail Rewards program.

WHOLESALE CFG

BONUS OFR CGF

TAX SETUP

Identifies the parameters of the Wholesale Rewards program.

Identifies the parameters of the Bonus Offers.

Identifies the type of tax to be considered in the miles calculation.

168 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

To access the Air Miles REWARD PROGRAM Set-up menu, from the

READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PROGRAM SETUP, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The REWARD PROGRAM Set-up menu appears.

7.2.2 Planning the Rewards Program Configuration

Air Miles rewards are awarded based on the formula you configure on the terminal as a

Reward Program.

7.2.2.1 Rewards Program Calculation Overview

The Air Miles Rewards program applies the Calculator and Factor values to the Purchase amount to determine the number of Reward miles to be awarded.

If an Incentive value, Start date and End date have been configured and the Purchase occurs within the Start and End dates, the number of Rewards miles will be multiplied by the incentive value to determine the number of Incentive Rewards to be awarded.

If Bonus Offers have been configured, and the cardholder has purchased a qualifying item, the program will multiply the Bonus Offer value by the number of items purchased to determine the number of Bonus Offer miles awarded.

The program then totals all miles awarded and compares it to the Maximum Rewards value to ensure it is not over the maximum before applying the miles to the cardholder's Rewards account.

7.2.2.2 Rewards Program Components

There are three components that may be used in calculating the reward miles:

Purchase Amount

The terminal calculates the number of rewards miles based on the dollar value of the cardholder's purchase to which configurable variables are applied.

Incentives

The terminal automatically applies a multiplication factor to any Air Miles Rewards miles that have been awarded within a configurable time period.

Bonus Offers

If the cardholder's Purchases include items identified as Bonus Offer items, the terminal awards a configurable number of miles per item.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 169

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.2.2.3 Rewards Program Parameters

Before configuring an Air Miles Rewards program on your terminal, you will need to decide which parameters to use in creating your formula and what values those parameters will have.

The parameters are:

Calculator and Factor values

Incentive parameters

Maximum Rewards value

Bonus Offer parameters

Tax Setup

7.2.3 Rewards Program Planning Worksheet

Print this sheet and fill in the values you wish to use for each parameter in the Rewards

Program. If the program has more than one Bonus Offer, print a copy of this worksheet for each Bonus Offer.

You will need to refer to these values when configuring the program.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

Step 1. Enable the Rewards Program:

Enable Reward Program?: YES

Step 2. Select the Program Type

Program Type (circle one): RETAIL or WHOLESALE

Step 3.i. Configure the Calculator and Factors

Calculator 1 ___________

Factor 1 ___________

Calculator 2 ___________

Factor 2 _________

Step 3.ii. Configure the Incentive:

Description ____________________________

Automatically applied? (circle one): YES or NO

Value ____

Incentive Start Date (YYYYMMDD): ______________________

Incentive End Date (YYYYMMDD): ______________________

Step 3.iii Set the maximum number of rewards per transaction:

Maximum Rewards per Transaction: _____________

Step 3.iv Set the Rewards Totals Reset time of day:

Rewards Totals Reset Time (HHMM): ______________

Step 3.v: Enable the Enter Reference Number prompt:

Enable Enter Reference Number prompt (circle one): YES or NO

Step 4. Configure the Bonus Offers:

170 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

Number: ________

Description: _________________________

Reward Type (circle one): MULTIPLIER or POINTS

If MULTIPLIER selected:

Value: _____________

Multiplier Type (circle one): BASE POINTS or BONUS OFFERS

Program Type (circle one): RETAIL or WHOLESALE or BOTH

If POINTS selected:

Number of miles: ______________

Program (circle one): RETAIL or WHOLESALE or BOTH

MLT Bonus Offer applicable: _____________

Start Date (YYYYMMDD): ______________________

End Date (YYYYMMDD): _______________________

Step 5. Configure the Tax Setup:

Tax Type: NO TAX or HST or GST/PST

Tax Percentage: Type: _______ = ______% and Type: ________ = ______%

Tax Mode: TAX ON TAX or TAX AND TAX

Step 6. Set the SAF Upload Time Period:

SAF Upload Time Period: (MM) ______________

7.2.4 Reward Program Components - Calculator and Factor Values

The Calculator and Factor values are the basic values for calculating Rewards miles based on a dollar amount. The Calculator amounts indicate the dollar value for which one reward unit is awarded. The Factor values indicate the number of times that the Calculator amount is applied (maximum is 99). If the Factor value is set to 99, that Calculator will be applied infinitely.

Some examples are provided below.

Example 1 : only one component value assigned (CALC 1) applied to a small amount ($10.00)

Example 2 : only one component value assigned (CALC 1) applied to a large amount

($300.00)

Example 3 : three component values assigned (CALC 1, FACTOR 1, and CALC 2) applied to

a large amount ($300.00)

Example 4 : four component values assigned (CALC 1, FACTOR 1, CALC 2 and FACTOR 2)

applied to a large amount ($300.00)

Example 1

Values:

CALC 1 = $2.00 FACTOR 1 = 99

CALC 2 = 0 FACTOR 2 = 0

PURCHASE = $10.00

Calculation:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 171

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

PURCHASE ÷ CALC 1 = REWARDS

$10.00 ÷ $2.00 = 5

Description:

Calculator 1 is applied to all sales of $2.00 or more, so the cardholder will receive 5 rewards miles for their $10.00 purchase.

Example 2

Values:

CALC 1 = $2.00 FACTOR 1 = 99

CALC 2 = 0 FACTOR 2 = 0

PURCHASE = $300.00

Calculation:

PURCHASE ÷ CALC 1 = REWARDS

$300.00 ÷ $2.00 = 150

Description:

Calculator 1 is applied to all sales of $2.00 or more, so the cardholder will receive 150 rewards miles for their $300.00 purchase.

Example 3

Values:

CALC 1 = $2.00 FACTOR 1 = 50

CALC 2 = $1.00 FACTOR 2 = 99

PURCHASE = $300.00

Calculation:

PURCHASE ÷ CALC 1 = REWARDS 1

$300.00 ÷ $2.00 = 150

If (REWARDS 1 > FACTOR 1) then (CALC 1 x FACTOR 1) = MAX PURCHASE 1

(150 > 50) so ($2.00 x 50) = $100.00

If (REWARDS 1 > FACTOR 1) then (MAX PURCHASE 1 ÷ CALC 1) = MAX

REWARDS 1

(150 > 50) so $100.00 ÷ $2.00 = 50

PURCHASE - MAX PURCHASE 1 = PURCHASE 2

$300.00 - 100.00 = $200.00

PURCHASE 2 ÷ CALC 2 = REWARDS 2

$200.00 ÷ $1.00 = 200

If FACTOR 2 = 99 then MAX REWARDS 1 + REWARDS 2 = TOTAL C/ F

REWARDS

FACTOR 2 = 99 so 50 + 200 = 250

Description:

Calculator 1 is applied to sales of more than $1.99 and less than $100.01, so the cardholder will receive 50 miles PLUS Calculator 2 will be applied to any remaining purchase value, so the cardholder will receive an additional 200 reward miles for a total of 250 miles

Example 4

172 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

Values:

CALC 1 = $2.00 FACTOR 1 = 52

CALC 2 = $1.00 FACTOR 2 = 98

PURCHASE = $300.00

REWARDS 1 = 150

MAX PURCHASE 1 = $104.00

MAX REWARDS 1 = 52

PURCHASE 2 = $196.00

REWARDS 2 = 196

Calculation:

PURCHASE ÷ CALC 1 = REWARDS 1

$300.00 ÷ $2.00 = 150

If (REWARDS 1 > FACTOR 1) then

(150 > 52)

(CALC 1 x FACTOR 1) = MAX PURCHASE 1

($2.00 x 52) = $104.00

(MAX PURCHASE 1 ÷ CALC 1) = MAX REWARDS 1

$104.00 ÷ $2.00 = 52

PURCHASE - MAX PURCHASE 1 = PURCHASE 2

$300.00 - $104.00 = $196.00

PURCHASE 2 ÷ CALC 2 = REWARDS 2

$196.00 ÷ $1.00 = 196

If FACTOR 2 < 99 then compare REWARDS 2 vs. FACTOR 2

(98 < 99) so (196 > 98)

If (REWARDS 2 > FACTOR 2) then

(196 > 98)

(CALC 2 x FACTOR 2) = MAX PURCHASE 2

($1.00 x 98) = $98.00

(MAX PURCHASE 2 ÷ CALC 2) = MAX REWARDS 2

($98.00 ÷ $1.00) = 98

MAX REWARDS 1 + MAX REWARDS 2 = TOTAL REWARDS

(52 + 98) = 150

Description:

Calculator 1 is applied to sales of more than $1.99 and less than $104.01, so the cardholder will receive 52 miles PLUS Calculator 2 will be applied to an additional

$98.00 of purchase value, so the cardholder will receive an additional 98 reward miles for a total of 150 miles.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 173

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.2.5 Reward Program Components - Bonus Offer Values

Within a program, Bonus Offers can be applied in one of three ways.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

1. As Miles ("points") - Specific items can qualify for additional Air Miles Rewards miles if they are defined as Bonus Offers in the Rewards configuration. Up to 20 items can be defined.

See Example 1

.

2. As a multiplier applied to base miles (similar to an Incentive) - If a cardholder purchases a qualifying item, an incentive value is applied to their C/ F rewards value. Only applicable if no other Incentive has been applied to the transaction. See

Example 2

.

3. As a multiplier applied to other Bonus Offers - If a cardholder qualifies for a Bonus Offer, the miles from that Bonus Offer may be eligible for the application of an additional multiplier

value. See Example 3 .

Some examples are provided below.

Example 1 : Bonus Offers as Points

Example 2 : Bonus Offer as a Multiplier applied to base miles

Example 3 : Bonus Offer as a Multiplier applied to other Bonus Offers

Example 1

Values:

PURCHASE AMOUNT: $438.55

TOTAL C/ F REWARDS: 115

BONUS OFFER configured as POINTS

BONUS OFFER 1: Points per BO Item - 12, Number of BO Items - 3

BONUS OFFER 2: Points per BO Item - 6, Number of BO Items - 7

Calculation:

Bonus Offer 1

Point per item x Number of Items = BO1 REWARDS

(12 x 3) = 36

Bonus Offer 2

Point per item x Number of Items = BO2 REWARDS

(6 x 7) = 42

BO1 REWARDS + BO2 REWARDS = TOTAL BO REWARDS

(36 + 42) = 78

TOTAL C/ F REWARDS + TOTAL BO REWARDS = TOTAL REWARDS

(115 + 78) = 193

Description:

The cardholder is awarded 115 miles for their Purchase. Then, because the cardholder purchased 3 of Bonus Offer item 1 with a value of 12 miles each and 7 of Bonus Offer item 2 with a value of 6 miles each, they qualify for an additional 78 miles for a grand total of 193 rewards miles.

Example 2

Values:

174 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

PURCHASE AMOUNT: $438.55

TOTAL C/ F REWARDS: 115

BONUS OFFER configured as BASE POINTS MULTIPLIER

VALUE: 1.5

Calculation:

C/ F REWARDS X BO MULTIPLIER VALUE = TOTAL REWARDS

(115 x 1.5) = 172

Description:

The cardholder was awarded 115 miles for their Purchase and has qualified for the

Bonus Offer. The miles for the purchase are multiplied by the Bonus Offer value of

1.5 for a grand total of 172 rewards miles.

Example 3

Values:

PURCHASE AMOUNT: $438.55

TOTAL C/ F REWARDS: 115

BONUS OFFER 1: Points per BO Item - 12, Number of BO Items - 3

BONUS OFFER 3: MULTIPLIER applicable to Bonus Offer 1

BO3 MULTIPLIER VALUE: 1.5

Calculation:

Bonus Offer 1

Point per item x Number of Items = BO1 REWARDS

(12 x 3) = 36

Bonus Offer 3

BO1 REWARDS x MULTIPLIER VALUE = BO3 REWARDS

(36 x 1.5) = 54

BO3 REWARDS + TOTAL C/ F REWARDS = TOTAL REWARDS

(54 + 115) = 169

Description:

The cardholder was awarded 115 miles for their Purchase. Then, because the cardholder purchased 3 of Bonus Offer item 1 with a value of 12 miles each, they qualify for an additional 36 miles. The cardholder has also qualified for Bonus Offer 3 so the Bonus Offer 1 miles are multiplied by the Bonus Offer 3 multiplier value of 1.5 for a grand total of 169 rewards miles.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 175

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.2.6 Reward Program Components - Incentive Values

If the Incentive value is greater than one, the rewards program awards additional rewards miles to a cardholder's account based on the Incentive value.

The Incentive value is multiplied by the Total Standard Rewards (calculated using the

Calculator and Factor values ) to determine the Total Incentive Rewards. The Incentive value

will only be applied during the period identified by the Incentive Start date and Incentive End date.'

An example including calculations and a description is provided below.

Values:

PURCHASE AMOUNT: $438.55

TOTAL STANDARD REWARDS: 115

INCENTIVE VALUE: 1.5

Calculation:

TOTAL STANDARD REWARDS x INCENTIVE VALUE = TOTAL INCENTIVE

REWARDS

(115 x 1.5) = 172

TOTAL INCENTIVE REWARDS - TOTAL STANDARD REWARDS =

INCENTIVE REWARDS

(172 - 115) = 67

Note: The Incentive Rewards value is printed on the Air Miles Purchase receipt rather than the Total Incentive Rewards.

Description:

The cardholder is awarded 115 miles for their purchase. This number of miles is multiplied by the Incentive value of 1.5 to give the cardholder a rewards total of 172 miles.

7.2.7 Order of Calculation

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

Bolded items are defined in the

Calculation Table below.

1. Calculate Rewards 1.

2. Review Factor 1:

If Factor 1 = 99 then DONE

If Factor 1 < 99 then:

3. Compare Factor 1 to Rewards 1.

If Factor 1 > Rewards 1 then award Rewards 1.

If Factor 1 < Rewards 1 then:

4. Calculate Max. Purchase 1.

5. Calculate Purchase 2.

6. Calculate Rewards 2.

7. Calculate Total Standard Rewards.

8. Review Incentive Value:

176 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

If Incentive Value < 1.00 then go to step 9.

If Incentive Value > 1.00 then calculate Incentive Rewards.

9. Review Bonus Offers:

If no Bonus Offers are configured then go to step 10

If one or more Bonus Offers are configured as Points then calculate Total Points

Bonus Offer Rewards.

If one or more Bonus Offers are configured as a Multiplier then calculate Total

Multiplier Bonus Offer Rewards.

10. Calculate the total rewards to be awarded:

If Incentive Value < 1.00 and no Bonus Offers are configured then award Total

Standard Rewards.

If Incentive Value < 1.00 and at least one Bonus Offer is configured then calculate the sum of Total Standard Rewards + Total Bonus Offer Rewards (multiplier or miles).

If Incentive Value >1.00 and no Bonus Offers are configured then award Total

Incentive Rewards.

If Incentive Value >1.00 and at least one Points Bonus Offer is configured then calculate the sum of Total Incentive Rewards + Total Points Bonus Offer

Rewards.

7.2.8 Rewards Calculation Table

Value Definition

Purchase

Calc 1

Factor 1

Calc 2

Factor 2

Rewards 1

Max. Purchase 1

Max. Rewards 1

Purchase 2

Rewards 2

Max. Purchase 2

Max. Rewards 2

Total Standard Rewards

Max. Total Standard Rewards

Dollar Amount after application of Tax Type values to amount keyed in at the ENTER

AMOUNT entry screen

Calculator 1

value

Factor 1

value

Calculator 2

value

Factor 2

value

Purchase ÷ Calc 1

Calc 1 x Factor 1

= Factor 1

Purchase - Max. Purchase 1

Purchase 2 ÷ Calc 2

Calc 2 x Factor 2

= Factor 2

Max. Rewards 1 + Rewards 2

Max Rewards 1 + Max Rewards 2

Note: This should not be greater than the value

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 177

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

Incentive Value

Incentive Rewards

Total Incentive Rewards

Bonus Offers

Points Bonus Offer # N Rewards

(PBO#N)

set for Maximum Rewards per transaction.

Incentive value

Total Incentive Rewards - Total Standard

Rewards.

Note: This value appears on Air Miles Purchase receipts.

Total Standards Rewards x Incentive Value

Bonus Offers configured

(Points Bonus Offer # N value) x number of items

Total Points Bonus Offer Rewards PBO#1 +... + PBO#N

Multiplier Bonus Offer # N

Rewards

(MBO#N)

Multiplier Value x (Points Bonus Offer # N

Rewards)

Total Multiplier Bonus Offer

Rewards

MBO#1 +... + MBO#N

Total Bonus Offer Rewards (Total Points Bonus Offer Rewards) + (Total

Multiplier Bonus Offer Rewards)

7.2.9 Enable the Rewards Program

You must enable the Rewards program on the terminal before you can process Air Miles

Rewards card transactions.

From the READY screen

: a. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears. b. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD PROGRAM menu appears. c. Scroll down to PROGRAM SETUP, and press the key.

Note: If the PROGRAM SETUP item does not appear on the REWARD PROGRAM menu, perform an

UPLOAD SAF transaction to clear the SAF Log then access the

REWARD PROGRAM menu and try again.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The REWARD PROGRAM Set-up menu appears. d. Press the key to select ENABLE REWARD.

The ENABLE REWARD PROGRAM? prompt appears. e. Press the key to select YES.

The default is NO.

The REWARD PROGRAM menu reappears with additional options.

178 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.2.10 Select the Type of Rewards Program

This process identifies the Reward program type to be configured and used to calculate the number of Air Miles Reward miles to be assigned during transactions.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to PROGRAM TYPE, and press the key.

The PROGRAM TYPE menu appears. b. Select the Program Type you wish to enable.

The REWARD PROGRAM menu reappears with additional options.

If you selected:

• RETAIL then the RETAIL CONFIG option appears on the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

• WHOLESALE then the WHOLESALE CFG option appears on the REWARD

PROGRAM menu.

• BOTH then both the RETAIL CONFIG option and the WHOLESALE CFG option appear on the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

Note: If you select BOTH, the

REWARD PURCHASE program selection prompt will

appear during Reward Purchases and the REWARD REFUND program selection prompt will

appear during Reward Refund transactions.

7.2.11 Configure the Calculator and Factor Values

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to RETAIL CONFIG, and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu appears. b. Press the key to select CALCULATOR 1.

The CALCULATOR 1 entry screen appears. c. Key in the value of Calculator 1 without the decimal mile, and press the key.

(min. = 0.001, max. = 9,999.999)

The REWARD CFG menu reappears.

Note: The default value of Factor 1 is 99. If you wish to leave the value as 99, then this step is

finished. Go back the " Configuring the Air Miles Rewards Program "procedure.

d. Scroll down to FACTOR 1, and press the key.

The FACTOR 1 entry screen appears. e. Key in the value of Factor 1, and press the key.

(min. = 01, max. = 99)

The REWARD CFG menu reappears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 179

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

f. Scroll down to Calculator 2, and press the key.

The CALCULATOR 2 entry screen appears. g. Key in the value of Calculator 2 without the decimal mile, and press the key.

(min. = 0.001, max. = 9,999.999)

The REWARD CFG menu reappears.

Note: The default value of Factor 2 is 99. If you wish to leave the value as 99 then this step is finished. Return to

Configuring Rewards

. h. Scroll down to FACTOR 2, and press the key.

The FACTOR 2 entry screen appears. i. Key in the value of Factor 2, and press the key.

(min. = 01, max. = 99)

The REWARD CFG menu reappears. j. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.12 Configure the Incentive Values

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to RETAIL CFG, and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu appears. b. Scroll down to INCENTIVE, and press the key.

The INCENTIVE entry screen appears. c. Key in the value of the Incentive, and press the key.

(min. 0.01, max. = 99.99, default = 1.00)

The REWRD CFG menu reappears.

To display a name for the incentive during Reward transactions: d. Scroll down to INCEN DESCRIPT, and press the key. e. Press the key to select DESCR ENGLISH.

The DESCRIPTION ENGLISH entry screen appears. f. Key in the English description of the incentive, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic character and punctuation ".)

Note: If you wish to display a French description when the terminal language is set to

French, repeat steps e. (select DESCR FRENCH this time) and f. g. Press the key to return to the REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu.

To apply the incentive automatically during Reward Purchases: h. Scroll down to AUTO INCENTIVE, and press the key.

The AUTOMATIC INCENTIVE? prompt appears.

180 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

i. To have the incentive applied automatically to all qualifying Reward Purchases, press the

key to select YES.

To display the

APPLY INCENTIVE? prompt during Reward Purchases, press the

key to select the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu re-appears.

To restrict the Incentive to a specific time frame: j. Scroll down to INCEN START DT, and press the key.

The INCENTIVE START DATE entry screen appears. k. Key in the first date the Incentive will be applied (YYYYMMDD), and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu reappears. l. Scroll down to INCEN END DT, and press the key.

The INCENTIVE END DATE entry screen appears. m. Key in the last date the Incentive will be applied (YYYYMMDD), and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu reappears. n. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.13 Configure the Maximum Rewards Allowed

If you wish to limit the number of miles that can be awarded for a single transaction, this process sets the maximum miles value to be considered in the miles calculation.

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to RETAIL CONFIG, and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu appears. b. Scroll down to MAXIMUM REWRDS, and press the key.

The MAXIMUM REWARDS entry screen appears. c. Key in the maximum number of rewards that can be rewarded for one Rewards transaction, and press the key.

(min. 1, max. 99,999, default = 50).

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu re-appears. d. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.14 Set the Rewards Totals Reset Time of day

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 181

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to RETAIL CFG, and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu appears. b. Scroll down to RESET TTL TIME, and press the key.

The RESET TOTALS TIME entry screen appears. c. Key in the time of day at which the Rewards Totals Log will be cleared, and press the

key.

This should be set to occur while the location is closed.

(24-hour clock, e.g. 11:30 PM would be entered as 2330).

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu re-appears. d. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.15 Enable the Enter Reference Number Prompt

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to RETAIL CONFIG, and press the key.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu appears. b. Scroll down to REFERENCE NO, and press the key.

The REFERENCE NUMBER? selection screen appears.

i. To display the ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen during Reward transactions,

press the key to select YES.

To disable the entry screen, press the key to select NO.

The REWRD CFG-RETAIL menu re-appears. c. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.16 Configure the Bonus Offers

This process establishes the parameters of the Bonus Offers available in the Rewards program.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

182 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to BONUS OFR CFG, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFER REWARD menu appears with the list of 20 possible bonus offers.

Note: If this is the first bonus offer to be configured, the list displays the bonus offer numbers 001 to 020. When a bonus offer has been configured with a description, the first 14 characters of that description are displayed on this list. b. Select a bonus offer number (e.g. 001), and press the key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu appears with the bonus offer name as the menu title.

To display a name for the Bonus Offer during Reward transactions: c. Press the key to select DESCR ENGLISH.

The DESCRIPTION ENGLISH entry screen appears. d. Key in the English description of the incentive, and press the

key. (Refer to " Entering alphabetic character and punctuation ".)

Note: If you wish to display a French description when the terminal language is set to

French, repeat steps c. (select DESCR FRENCH this time) and d.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears with the bonus offer name as the menu title.

To set the type of Bonus Offer as MULTIPLIER: e. Scroll down to REWARD TYPE, and press the key.

The REWARD TYPE menu reappears. f. To use a multiplier to calculate Bonus Offer miles, select MULTIPLIER, and press the

key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. g. Scroll down to MULTIPLIER, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFR REWRD MULTIPLIER entry screen appears. h. Key in the value of the multiplier (min. 1.00, max. 99.99), and press the key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. i. Scroll down to MULTIPLR TYPE, and press the key.

The MULTIPLIER TYPE menu appears. j. Select BASE POINTS to have the multiplier behave as an incentive.

Select BONUS OFFERS to have the multiplier applied to another bonus offer.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. k. Scroll down to PROGRAM TYPE, and press the key.

The PROGRAM TYPE menu appears. l. Select the Program type, and press the key.

To display the Bonus Offer prompt during:

- Retail program transactions, select RETAIL.

- Wholesale program transactions, select WHOLESALE.

- transactions of either program type, select BOTH.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears.

To set the type of Bonus Offer as POINTS: e. Scroll down to REWARD TYPE, and press the key.

The REWARD TYPE menu reappears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 183

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

f. To set a specific number of miles for a Bonus Offer, select POINTS, and press the

key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. g. Scroll down to NO. OF POINTS, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFER REWARDS entry screen appears. h. Key in the number of miles to be awarded to purchases that match the criteria for this bonus offer, and press the key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. i. Scroll down to PROGRAM TYPE, and press the key.

The PROGRAM TYPE selection screen appears. j. Select the Program type, and press the key.

To display the Bonus Offer during:

- Retail program transaction, select RETAIL.

- Wholesale program transactions, select WHOLESALE.

- transactions of either program type, select BOTH.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears.

If Multiplier Bonus Offers have also been configured with a Multiplier Type of "Bonus

Offers", the MLT BONUS OFFER item appears on the Bonus Offer setup menu.

To be able to apply a Multiplier Bonus Offer to a Points Bonus Offer: k. Scroll down to MLT BONUS OFFER, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFER REWARD menu appears. l. Scroll down to the Bonus Offer (listed by number or by description if it has one), and press the key to apply the Multiplier Bonus Offer to the Points Bonus Offer you selected.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears.

To restrict the Bonus Offer to a specific time frame: m. Scroll down to BONUS START DT, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFR START DATE entry screen appears. n. Key in the first date the bonus offers will be available (YYYYMMDD), and press the

key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu reappears. o. Scroll down to BONUS END DATE, and press the key.

The BONUS OFFR END DATE entry screen appears. p. Key in the last date the bonus offers will be available (YYYYMMDD), and press the

key.

The Bonus Offer Setup menu re-appears. q. Press the key twice to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.17 Configure the Tax Type

If you wish to apply the Rewards calculation to the Purchase dollar value before taxes, this process identifies the type and amount of tax to be considered in the miles calculation.

Refer to your

Rewards Program Planning worksheet

for the values to key in for each parameter.

The configuration steps are the same for both the RETAIL and the WHOLESALE program types. The following instructions refer specifically to the Retail program. To configure the

184 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

Wholesale program, follow these instructions substituting WHOLESALE wherever you see

RETAIL.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

: a. Scroll down to TAX SETUP, and press the key.

The TAX SETUP menu appears. b. Select TAX TYPE, and press the key.

The TAX TYPE menu appears. c. Select the type of tax your business charges on Purchases.

The TAX SETUP menu reappears. d. Scroll down to the tax type your business charges on Purchases, and press the key.

The TAX PERCENTAGE entry screen appears. e. Key in the Tax percentage, and press the key.

(min. 0.01, max. 99.99)

The TAX SETUP menu reappears.

Note: If your business applies 2 types of tax, e.g. GST and PST, repeat steps d. and e. for each type of tax. f. If the Tax Type was GST/PST, scroll down to TAX MODE, and press the key.

The TAX MODE menu appears. g. Select the method used to calculate the tax, and press the key.

The TAX SETUP menu reappears. h. Press the key to return to the REWARD PROGRAM menu.

7.2.18 Configure the SAF Upload Time Period

This function sets the time period that must pass between the last SAF Upload attempt

(automatic or manually prompted) and the next automatic SAF Upload attempt.

Note: The default is 5. If you wish to use this value you do not need to perform this step.

From the REWARD PROGRAM menu

:

1. Select SAF UPD PERIOD.

The SAF UPLOAD TIME PERIOD entry screen appears.

2. Key in the number of minutes the terminal must wait before attempting an automatic SAF

Upload transaction, and press the key. (min. 1 minute, max. 15 minutes, default is 5 minutes)

The REWARD PROGRAM menu re-appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 185

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.3 Air Miles Transactions

7.3.1 Air Miles Rewards - Purchase

This transaction awards Air Miles Reward miles to an Air Miles cardholder for Purchases that they have made at your location.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Press the key to select PURCHASE.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

If the REWARD PURCHASE menu appears, select the program (RETAIL or

WHOLESALE) to be used for calculating miles and press the key.

If the ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears, key in the Reference number (min. 1, max. 4 digits), and press the key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

4. Key in the dollar amount of the Purchase, and press the key.

If the

APPLY INCENTIVE?

prompt appears, refer to the "Applying the Incentive to

Air Miles Rewards Purchase" procedure.

If the

ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt appears, refer to the "Add Bonus Offers during

a Rewards Purchase " procedure.

The ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt appears.

If the

ZERO POINTS AWARDED

message or the REWARD EXCEEDS LIMIT

message appears, no miles are awarded. The transaction is cancelled, and the terminal returns to the READY screen automatically.

5. Swipe the Air Miles card on the terminal.

OR

Key in the Air Miles Card number, and press the key, and then select the language to be used on the cardholder receipt.

The Cardholder copy of the receipt is printed.

6. Press the key.

The Merchant copy of the receipt is printed.

7. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

186 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.3.2 Add Bonus Offers during a Rewards Purchase

If one or more Bonus Offers were enabled for the Rewards program used to calculate miles on this transaction, and the cardholder has purchased items that qualify as Bonus Offers, you must select those Bonus Offers in order to calculate the correct number of miles to be added to the cardholder's account.

The ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt appears. a. To select the Bonus Offers to be applied to this transaction, press the key to select YES.

To continue without applying Bonus Offers, press the key to select NO, and go to the ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt.

The list of Bonus Offers configured for this Rewards Program appears. b. Select a Bonus Offer, and press the key.

The ENTER QUANTITY entry screen appears. c. Key in the number of Bonus Offer items purchased, and press the key.

If the APPLY MULTIPLIER? prompt appears:

To apply the multiplier, press the key to select YES.

To continue without applying the multiplier, press the key to select NO.

If the ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt re-appears:

To select another Bonus Offer, repeat steps a. through c.

To continue without selecting additional Bonus Offers, press the key to select NO.

The ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt appears.

Continue the

Air Miles Reward Purchase

.

7.3.3 Applying the Incentive to an Air Miles Rewards Purchase

If an

Incentive was enabled for the Rewards program used to calculate miles on this

transaction:

The APPLY INCENTIVE? prompt appears with the incentive name on the second line. a. Press the key to select YES and apply the Incentive to the miles calculation.

Press the key to select NO to continue without applying the incentive.

The next prompt appears.

Continue the

Air Miles Reward Purchase

.

7.3.4 Air Miles Rewards - Refund

This transaction removes Air Miles Reward miles from an Air Miles cardholder's account for items they have returned to your location.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 187

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to REFUND, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe your MONERIS POS Admin card.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears instead, refer to the "Entering the

Clerk ID" procedure.

If the REWARD REFUND menu appears, select the program (RETAIL or

WHOLESALE) to be used for calculating miles and press the key.

If the ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER entry screen appears, key in the

REFERENCE number that appears on the Reward Purchase receipt and press the

key.

The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Reward Purchase Amount that appears on the Reward Purchase receipt, and press the key.

The ENTER STANDARD POINTS REFUNDED entry screen appears.

6. Key in the number of Standard Points that appear on the Reward Purchase receipt, and press the key.

The ENTER INCENTIVE POINTS REFUNDED entry screen appears.

7. Key in the number of Incentive miles that appear on the Reward Purchase receipt, and press the key.

If there are no incentive miles listed on the Purchase receipt, simply press the key.

If the

ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt appears, refer to the "Add Bonus Offers during

a Rewards Refund" procedure.

The ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt appears.

8. Swipe the Air Miles card on the terminal.

OR

Key in the Air Miles Card number, then press the key, and then select the language to be used on the Cardholder copy of the receipt.

The Cardholder copy of the receipt is printed.

9. Press the key.

The Merchant copy of the receipt is printed.

10. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

7.3.5 Add Bonus Offers during a Rewards Refund

If one or more Bonus Offers were enabled for the Rewards program used to calculate miles on the Air Miles Reward Purchase transaction, you must select those Bonus Offers in the Air

Miles Refund transaction in order to calculate the correct number of miles to be removed from the cardholder's account.

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

The ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt appears. a. To select the Bonus Offers to be applied to this transaction, press the key to select YES.

188 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

To continue without applying Bonus Offers, press the key to select NO and go to the ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt.

The ENTER BONUS OFFER entry screen appears. b. Key in the 3-digit Bonus Offer number, and press the key.

The Bonus Offer number appears on the Air Miles Reward Purchase receipt to the left of the first 14 characters of the bonus offer name (e.g. if bonus offer 001 is named

"June and July Offer" then the receipt will display "001 JUNE AND JULY " and the

Bonus Offer number to be entered here is 001).

The POINTS REFUNDED entry screen appears. c. Key in the number of Bonus Offer miles, and press the key. The number of miles appears on the Air Miles Reward Purchase receipt to the right of the Rewards

Program type (e.g. RETAIL #### or WHOLESALE ####).

If the ADD BONUS OFFERS prompt re-appears:

To select another Bonus Offer, repeat steps a. through c.

To continue without selecting additional Bonus Offers, press the key to select NO.

The ENTER COLLECTOR CARD prompt appears.

Continue the

Air Miles Reward Refund

.

7.4 Air Miles Admin Transactions

7.4.1 Completing Air Miles Reward Transactions

Air Miles transactions are not complete until they have been uploaded to the Moneris Host for processing.

The terminal automatically connects to the Moneris Host to upload and complete the

transactions in the Reward SAF Log (listed in the Air Miles Reward SAF Log ; refer to the

"Printing the Air Miles Rewards SAF List" procedure). The message UPLOAD SAF appears at the top of the screen while the terminal communicates with the Moneris Host. The transactions are then cleared from the Reward SAF Log and saved in the Reward Transactions

Log (listed in the

Air Miles Reward Transaction List ; refer to the "Printing the Air Miles

Rewards Transaction List" procedure).

If this process has not occurred or you wish to send the transactions in the Reward SAF Log before they are scheduled to be sent automatically, you can send them any time using the

UPLOAD SAF function.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to UPLOAD SAF, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays the communication status while it sends the SAF transactions to the

Moneris Host, and then the terminal returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 189

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.4.2 Printing the Air Miles Rewards SAF List

This report prints or displays a list of all Air Miles Rewards transactions in the Rewards SAF log. These are Air Miles transactions that have not been sent to the Moneris Host for completion.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to SAF INQUIRY, and press the key.

If SAF INQUIRY does not appear on the menu, there are no transactions in Rewards

SAF log. Press the key to return the READY screen.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears.

4. To print the list of Air Miles Rewards transactions, press the key to select PRINT.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report and then returns to the READY screen.

To delete an Air Miles SAF

transaction, refer to "Deleting a transaction from the Air Miles

Rewards SAF List".

7.4.3 SAF Log Status Icons

The SAF Log status icon appears in the top left corner of the terminal display on the

following screens: MAIN MENU

,

TRANSACTIONS ,

REPORT FUNCS ,

ADMIN FUNCS

,

and CONFIG FUNCS

.

Icon Description

The SAF log is nearly full and a manual SAF Upload

transaction should be performed.

The SAF log is full. The next time the terminal returns to the READY screen, it will perform an automatic

SAF Upload

. No other transactions can be processed until the SAF Upload has been successfully completed.

7.4.4 Deleting a transaction from the Air Miles Rewards SAF List

If an Air Miles Rewards transactions does not need to be sent to the Moneris Host for completion, e.g. if you wish to cancel the transaction before it is completed, you can delete the transaction from the Air Miles Rewards SAF Log in order to ensure that it is not completed accidentally.

Perform a Air Miles Rewards SAF Inquiry to find the transaction you wish to delete. When

the PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears:

190 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

A. Press the key to select DISPLAY.

The terminal searches its memory for Air Miles SAF transactions.

B. The TRANSAC TO DELETE Menu displays the matching transactions on the screen, one transaction per line.

To select a particular transaction, scroll through the list until the transaction is highlighted then press the key.

TRANSAC TO

DELETE

T NNNN $999.99

T NNNN $999.99

T NNNN $999.99

T = Transaction Type:

P = Reward Purchase

R = Reward Refund

NNNN = last 4 digits of the Card number

999.99 = last 5 digits of the transaction amount

The DELETE TRANSACTION? screen appears.

C. Confirm that this is the correct transaction then press the key (YES) to remove it from the terminal memory.

IMPORTANT: Once deleted, the Air Miles Reward transaction can no longer be completed.

If the DELETE TRANS, SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS

Admin card on the terminal to delete the transaction.

The terminal deletes the selected transaction from the terminal memory and returns to the

TRANSAC TO DELETE menu.

D. To select another Air Miles Rewards transaction to delete, repeat steps B and C.

To return to the READY screen, press the key.

7.4.5 Printing an Air Miles Rewards Totals Report

This report checks the Air Miles Reward Log and produces a list of

• the total dollar value of all Rewards Transactions

• the total number of Rewards miles awarded

• the total number of Rewards transactions performed

The Air Miles Reward Log contains all Rewards transactions performed since the log was last cleared (see

Reset Rewards Total Time

).

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to REWARD TOTALS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report and then returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 191

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.4.6 Printing the Air Miles Rewards Transaction List

This report prints a list of all transactions that match the criteria you select. If you do not select any criteria (i.e. you simply press the key as each criteria appears), all transactions in the terminal memory are listed.

Criteria are:

• Date of Transaction

• Card Number

• Number of Points

Note: "POINTS" is displayed on terminal prompts while "miles" is printed on transaction receipts.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to REWARD LIST, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The criteria appear in order.

4. The DATE (YY) MMDD entry screen appears.

To select all transactions regardless of the date they were processed, simply press the

key.

OR

To select transactions processed on a specific date, key in the date in the format indicated on the screen (the 2-digit year is optional) and press the key.

5. The CARD NUMBER entry screen appears.

To select all Card numbers, simply press the key.

OR

To select a specific card, key in the Card number, and press the key.

6. The REWARD POINTS entry screen appears.

To select all transactions regardless of the number of miles awarded, simply press the

key.

OR

To select transactions of a specific number of miles, key in the amount, and press the

key.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report and then returns to the READY screen.

192 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.4.7 Printing an Air Miles Rewards Configuration List

When you have finished configuring the Air Miles Rewards program on your terminal, perform this function in order to have a printed record of the terminal’s parameters. See printout example.

Each program (i.e. RETAIL and WHOLESALE) has a separate section for program parameters including:

• Calculator values

• Factor values

• Incentive values, descriptions and dates

• Tax settings

• Bonus Offer parameters

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to PRINT CFG, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report then returns to the READY screen.

7.4.8 Printing an Air Miles Rewards Help List

This report lists all the functions and transactions that are enabled on the terminal and the corresponding

Admin Shortcut code .

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to HELP LIST, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report and then returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 193

7 The Air Miles Rewards Program

7.4.9 Rewards - Reprint Last Receipt

This transaction prints a * DUPLICATE* cardholder copy of the last Rewards receipt printed.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REWARDS, and press the key.

The REWARD MENU appears.

3. Scroll down to REPRINT, and press the key.

A duplicate of the most recently printed Rewards receipt is printed.

The terminal returns to the REWARD MENU.

4. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

194 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

8 Admin Transactions

8.1 Log On

From the PLEASE LOGON prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Press the key to select LOGON.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

5. The READY screen appears.

The terminal is now ready to process transactions.

If this is your first time using the terminal, use the Training mode to practise performing

transactions.

Note: To ensure unauthorized transactions cannot be processed, the terminal should be

logged off

at the end of the business day.

8.2 Log Off

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to LOGOFF, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

5. The PLEASE LOGON prompt appears.

The terminal can NOT process transactions while the PLEASE LOGON prompt is displayed although some reports can be processed and the terminal configuration can be changed.

To process transactions again, the terminal must be logged on .

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 195

8 Admin Transactions

8.3 Clear Storage

This operation clears all stored transaction data (including card data) for debit, credit, gift, and loyalty transactions from the terminal's memory. The Clear Storage operation should only be used after you perform all of the prescribed end-of-day steps including printing the Stored

Transactions report (see " End-of-Day Procedure

").

IMPORTANT: Once the terminal's memory is cleared, it will not be possible to use the terminal to do any of the following:

• Perform a report generated from the card data previously stored in the terminal's memory, specifically:

- Transaction Inquiry

- Stored Transactions

- Pre-Auth List

• Complete or cancel any open Pre-Auths that were previously stored in the terminal's memory.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU menu appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLEAR STORAGE, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe your POS Admin card .

The CLEAR TERMINAL STORAGE? prompt appears.

4. To clear transaction data and report totals from terminal memory, press the key (YES).

Note: If you select YES and then subsequently attempt to perform a report (i.e., Transaction

Inquiry, Stored Transactions, or Pre-Auth List) or perform a Pre-Auth Advice, all of which are generated from card data previously stored in the terminal's memory, you will get a

TRANSACTION NOT FOUND response.

5. Press the key twice to return to the READY screen.

196 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

8 Admin Transactions

8.4 Training Mode

8.4.1 Training Mode

Training mode allows you and your employees to practise operating the Moneris iWL220 terminal without affecting your terminal total amounts, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

Note: Once you enter Training mode you can not change the terminal language. If you wish

to change the terminal language you must exit Training mode, change the terminal display language

, and then enter Training mode again.

When using a chip card to perform chip transactions in Training mode, the card will prompt for a PIN even if the card requires a signature in normal processing mode. The terminal will then display PIN ENTERED BY CUSTOMER instead of allowing the PIN to be entered.

After five seconds the terminal will continue the transaction.

8.4.2 Transactions Available in Training mode

Most transactions can be practised in

Training mode on the terminal. Refer to the tables below

for a complete list.

Financial Transactions by Card Type

Reporting Functions

Administrative Functions

Gift/Loyalty Transactions and Reports

Air Miles Rewards Transactions and Functions

Transactions that cannot be performed do not appear on the terminal screen while in Training mode.

Admin codes can be used in Training mode if the transaction or function is available in

Training mode.

Note: Training transactions are limited to a maximum amount of $1.00.

If

Tip Entry is enabled, the maximum tip amount in Training mode is $1.00.

If

Cashback

is enabled, the maximum Cashback amount in Training mode is $1.00.

The maximum final total amount (Purchase + Tip +Cashback) is $3.00.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 197

8 Admin Transactions

Financial Transactions by Card Type

Most financial transactions are available regardless of the type of card used, however

Purchasing Cards (i.e., Corporate cards) cannot be used while in Training mode.

Purchase

Refund

Pre-Authorization

Pre-Authorization Advice

Swipe or Insert or

Tap

Swipe or Insert or

Tap

Swipe or Insert

With Sequence

Number

With Voice Auth

Number

Swipe or Insert or

Tap

Swipe or Insert or

Tap

-

-

Pre-Authorization Advice

List

Voids a Purchase

Voids a Refund

X

Swipe or Insert

Swipe or Insert

Functions

Reporting

Functions

CLOSE BATCH

TRANS LIST

TRANS INQUIRY

DEPOSIT TOTALS

MERCH

SUBTOTAL

TIP TOTALS

CLERK INQUIRY

PRE-AUTH LIST

Admin Functions

REPRINT

BACKLIGHT

TRAINING

POWER OFF

-

Swipe or Insert

Swipe or Insert

198 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

8 Admin Transactions

Gift/Loyalty Transactions

Gift Card Transactions Loyalty card Transactions

Purchase

using Gift Card

Refund

using Gift Card

Activate/Reload Gift Card

Purchase (awards points)

Refund (removes points)

Redemption (uses points)

Deactivate

Gift Card

Card Inquiry

on Gift Card

Void of Gift Card

Transaction

Reprint

a Gift Card Receipt

Activate Loyalty card

Deactivate Loyalty card

Card Inquiry on Loyalty

card

Void of Points Transaction

Reprint a Loyalty card

Receipt

8.4.3 Gift/Loyalty Reports

Gift/Loyalty Close Batch

Gift/Loyalty Stored Transactions

Gift/Loyalty Transaction Inquiry

Clerk Inquiry on Gift/Loyalty Transaction

Gift/Loyalty Tip Totals

Air Miles Rewards Transactions and Functions

Purchase

Refund

Reprint

Help List

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 199

8 Admin Transactions

8.4.4 Entering Training Mode

Note:

Training mode

can only be activated on terminals that have been configured, initialized and logged on.

IMPORTANT:

Ensure that you exit Training mode before processing actual financial

transactions. Transactions processed in Training mode will NOT affect your terminal totals, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the

key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to TRAINING, and press the key.

The CLEAR TRAINING TOTALS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Select YES to clear the Training Totals amount to zero

OR

Select NO to leave the Training Total amounts as they are.

The

training screen appears.

The text "(TRAINING)" appears on the READY screen. The Training icon appears in the top left corner on all other menu screens.

All transactions performed on the terminal will now be in Training mode until you exit Training mode

. All financial training transactions will be approved and stored in the terminal’s memory in Training Totals.

All receipts for training transactions and reports on training totals will have a * TRAINING * TRAINING *

TRAINING * banner printed on them at the top, middle and bottom.

IMPORTANT: Ensure that you exit Training Mode

before processing actual financial

transactions. Transactions processed in Training mode will not affect your terminal totals, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

8.4.5 Exiting Training Mode

IMPORTANT: Ensure that you exit Training mode before processing actual financial transactions. Transactions processed in Training mode will NOT affect your terminal totals, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

From the TRAINING screen :

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

key.

3. Scroll down to TRAINING, and press the

The terminal returns to the

READY screen .

key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card .

IMPORTANT: All transactions performed on the terminal will now be in normal mode.

They WILL affect your terminal totals, your financial accounts, and your customers’ accounts.

200 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

9.1 Clerk Subtotalling Reports

9.1.1 Clerk Subtotals Report for All Clerks

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

one clerk

or a group of clerks

.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key (MULTIPLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (Yes) to reset the totals for all Clerk IDs to zero.

The MULT CLERKS(00 PEND) menu appears.

5. Scroll down to ALL CLERKS, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints: a. The CLERK SUBTOTALS report for each Clerk ID b. The OVERALL TOTALS report for all Clerk IDs.

When the reports are finished printing, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

9.1.2 Clerk Subtotals Report for One Clerk

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

all clerks

or a

group of clerks

.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 201

9 Reports

3. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key (SINGLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (YES) to reset the totals for the Clerk ID to zero.

The ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears.

5. Key in the Clerk ID, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".)

Note: You must enter the Clerk ID even if the Default Clerk ID feature has been enabled.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints the CLERK SUBTOTALS report and returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

9.1.3 Clerk Subtotals Report for a Group of Clerks

Note: You can also perform a Clerk Subtotals Report for

all clerks or one clerk .

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to CLERK INQUIRY, and press the key.

The SINGLE/MULTIPLE CLERKS? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

4. Press the key (MULTIPLE).

If enabled, the ZERO CLERK TOTALS? prompt appears. a. Press the key (YES) to reset the totals for all selected Clerk IDs to zero.

The MULT CLERKS(00 PEND) menu appears.

5. Scroll down to GROUP, and press the key.

The ENTER GROUP ID TO BE PROCESSED entry screen appears.

6. Key in the Group identifier, and press the key.

The MULT CLERKS(01 PEND) menu appears.

To continue selecting Clerk ID Groups, repeat steps 5 and 6

When all the Clerk IDs have been added:

7. Scroll down to PROCESS LIST, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints:

202 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

a. The CLERK SUBTOTALS report for each Clerk ID that belongs to the Clerk ID

Group b. The OVERALL TOTALS report for the Clerk ID Group.

When the reports are finished printing, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears..., refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty

Report after a Financial Report" procedure.

9.2 Printing the Configuration Parameters Report

When you have finished configuring your terminal, perform this function in order to have a printed record of the terminal’s parameters. Included on the printout are:

- software revision number (under Term Software Revision)

- terminal identification information (under Host Initialization Parameters)

- features enabled from the GENERAL PARAMS menu (under Terminal Configuration)

- printer setup (under Printer Configuration)

- all receipt trailer messages, pre-programmed and customized (under Trailer Message)

- communications parameters (under Dial Comms Parms and Ethernet Parms)

- communications base parameters (under Base Config)

- optional features if enabled (e.g., Purchasing Card Parms,

Multi-Terminal Parms, Clerk Multi- Subtotals Parms)

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to CONFIG LIST, and press the key.

The PRINT TRAILER MESSAGES? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

4. Press the key (NO) to skip the trailer message text OR

Press the key (YES) to include the text of all receipt trailer messages (English and French) programmed on your terminal.

Note: This will use quite a bit of paper, especially if there are a number of trailer messages configured.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report then returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 203

9 Reports

9.3 EMV Parameters List

This report shows the current values for the EMV parameters.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to EMV PARMS LIST, and press the key.

The EMV PARMS LIST screen appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal prints out the EMV parameters list and then returns to the READY screen.

9.4 EMV Transaction Data

This function prints the DE55 data for the most recent EMV transaction to go online. The terminal stores the data of the last EMV transaction to go online. That data is kept in memory until the next EMV transaction is started, whereupon the previous data are erased. New data are saved only if the transaction goes online.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to ADMIN, and press the key.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to EMV TRNS DATA, and press the key.

The terminal displays PRINTING while the report prints.

The ADMIN FUNCS menu appears.

4. Press the key twice to return to the READY screen.

9.5 Current Batch Totals Report

This report is printed as part of the Close Batch transaction; however, it can be printed without closing the batch.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

204 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

3. Scroll to CLOSE BATCH, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

4. The terminal prints the report.

The CLOSE BATCH? prompt appears.

5. Press the key to select NO and print the report without closing the batch.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT press the key to select YES unless you want to close the batch at this time.

The terminal finishes printing the report and returns to the READY screen.

9.6 Deposit Totals Inquiry

The Deposit Totals Inquiry report provides transaction type totals by card type from the

Moneris Host and grand totals by transaction type.

Note: Visa Debit transactions may appear under "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there may be no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to DEPOSIT TOTALS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

4. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

5. The report prints and the terminal returns to the READY screen.

9.7 Tip Totals Report

This function prints a summary of all Tip amounts entered for Purchase and Pre-Auth Advice transactions stored in the current or a previous batch.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to TIP TOTALS, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure..

(If no Clerk ID is entered, the results for all Clerk IDs are printed.)

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 205

9 Reports

The PRINT DATE OR BATCH? prompt appears.

4. Press the key (for Tip totals by date) or the key

(for Tip totals by batch)

If you pressed the key

(Tip totals by date)...

The START DATE (YY)MMDD entry screen appears. a. Key in the Start date (the year is optional), and press the key.

Note: The date format is year (YY), month (MM), and day (DD) (e.g., to enter Dec. 31, 2013, you would key in

131231).

The START TIME [HHMM] menu appears.

If you pressed the key

(Tip totals by batch)...

The BATCH NUMBER entry screen appears. a. Key in the Batch number, or leave this field blank

(for the current batch), and press the key.

The terminal prints the report and then returns to the

READY screen. b. Key in the Start time, and press the key.

Note: The time format is hours (HH) and minutes (MM)

(e.g., to enter 1:00 AM, you would key in 0100).

The END DATE (YY)MMDD entry screen appears. c. Key in the End date (year is optional), and press the

key.

Note: The date format is year (YY), month (MM), and day (DD) (e.g., to enter Dec. 31, 2013, you would key in

131231).

The END TIME [HHMM] entry screen appears. d. Key in the End time, and press the key.

Note: You must enter a valid End time value.

The time format is hours (HH) and minutes (MM) (e.g., to enter 11:59 PM, you would key in 2359).

The terminal prints the report and then returns to the

READY screen.

9.8 Printing a Help List

This report lists all the functions and transactions that are enabled on the terminal and the corresponding

Admin Shortcut Code

.

From the READY screen or the TERMINAL SETUP REQUIRED prompt:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll up (it's faster) to HELP LIST, and press the key.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report then returns to the READY prompt.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

206 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

9.9 Merchant Subtotals Report

This function prints the merchant totals for the current batch from the Moneris Host.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen

:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MERCH SUBTOTAL, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

4. The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report then returns to the READY screen.

9.10 Printing the Pre-Authorization List

This report lists all Pre-Authorization transactions in the terminal memory that match the criteria you select.

Criteria are:

• Open or closed

• Transaction Date

• Batch Number

The results are printed.

Note: Visa Debit transactions may appear under "VISA" on the report (i.e., there may be no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to PRE-AUTH LIST, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe the POS Admin card , or simply press the

key.

The PRE-AUTH LIST menu appears.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

5. Select the type of Pre-Authorization transaction:

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 207

9 Reports

• To print only Pre-Authorizations that have NOT been completed (i.e. an Advice has

NOT been processed for this Pre-Authorization), select OPEN.

• To print only Pre-Authorizations that have been completed (i.e. an Advice has been processed for this Pre-Authorization), select CLOSED.

• To print all Pre-Authorizations, Open and Closed, in the terminal memory, select

BOTH.

The PRINT DATE OR BATCH? prompt appears.

6. Select the order in which you want the Pre-Authorization transactions to be listed in the report:

• To print the report by date, press the

key (DATE).

The DATE (YY) MMDD entry screen appears.

Simply press the key.

• To print the report for a specific date, press the

key (DATE).

The DATE (YY) MMDD entry screen appears.

Key in the date, and press the key.

• To print the report by Batch number, press the

key (BATCH).

The BATCH NUMBER entry screen appears.

Simply press the key.

• To print the report for a specific Batch number, press the

key (BATCH).

The BATCH NUMBER entry screen appears.

Key in the batch number and press the key.

7. The terminal displays PRINTING while it prints the report then returns to the READY prompt.

9.11 Delete a Pre-Authorization using Transaction Inquiry

You can delete a Pre-Authorization transaction that will not be completed (e.g. the cardholder

choose another method of payment when the final amount was known) in order to ensure that it is not completed accidentally.

Perform a Transaction Inquiry function using the "Card Number" and " Trans to Search"

criteria to find the Pre-Authorization transaction you wish to delete. When the PRINT OR

DISPLAY? prompt appears:

A. Press the key to select DISPLAY.

The terminal searches its memory for matching transactions.

B. The Trans Inquiry Menu displays the matching transactions on the screen, one transaction per line.

To select a particular Pre-Authorization transaction, scroll through the list until the transaction is highlighted then press the key.

Note: Pre-Authorization transactions begin with 'PA'.

208 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

TRANS INQUIRY

TTNNNN $999.99

TTNNNN $999.99

TTNNNN $999.99

CCCCCCCCCCC XXXX

TT $999,999.99

NEXT REPRINT

TT = Transaction Type:

P = Purchase

R = Refund

PA = Pre-Authorization

A = Advice

VP = Void Purchase

VR = Void Refund

Y = Payment

VY = Void Payment

NNNN = last 4 digits of the Card number

999.99 = last 5 digits of the transaction amount

C. Detailed information about the selected transaction appears.

TRANS INQUIRY CCCCCCCCCCC = last 11 digits of the Card number

XXXX:

- for Credit (and some debit chip cards)= transaction date

- for Debit = CHQ or SAV

TT = Transaction Type (see above)

999,999.99 = transaction amount

D. Press the key (NEXT).

The DELETE PRE-AUTH? screen appears.

DELETE PRE-AUTH?

CCCCCCCCCCC MMDD

TT $999,999.99

NEXT DELETE

E. Confirm that this is the correct transaction then press the key (DELETE) to remove it from the terminal memory.

IMPORTANT: Once deleted, the Pre-Authorization transaction can no longer be completed using the Advice transaction.

F. The terminal deletes the Pre-Authorization from the terminal memory and returns to the

Trans Inquiry Menu.

To select another Pre-Authorization transaction to delete, repeat steps B

through E.

To return to the READY screen, press the key repeatedly.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 209

9 Reports

9.12 Private Label Transactions on Reports

Private label transactions appear as a separate card type on all reports that include credit card transactions including:

Stored Transactions List

Transaction Inquiry

Deposit Total Inquiry

Clerk Subtotals Inquiry

Multiple Terminal Report

Merchant Subtotals Report

Current Batch Totals Report

Tip Totals Report

9.13 Printing a Stored Transactions Report

This report contains information about the transactions in the terminal's memory. It prints only the terminal totals (i.e. the number of transactions and total dollar amount by card type), or a list of all transactions in the terminal's memory by date or by batch number followed by the terminal totals.

Note: This is the only report that lists information about

Cashback transactions. It includes

the number of transactions utilizing Cashback and the total dollar amount of all Cashback transactions in the terminal memory.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

Note: This is the only report that identifies chip card transactions. See step 7.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to TRANS LIST, and press the key.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

4. Swipe your POS Admin card , or simply press the

key.

The PRINT DATE OR BATCH? prompt appears.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

5. Select the sorting method for the report:

Press the key to print the transactions that occur on a specific date.

Press the key to print the transactions that occur in a specific batch.

210 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

Note: Select the key if you are printing a Transactions List for the End-of-Day procedure.

6. If you pressed the key for Date, key in the date in YYMMDD format.

If you pressed the key for Batch, key in the Batch number.

OR simply press the key to include all transactions in the terminal memory.

The PRINT TOTALS ONLY? prompt appears.

7. If you wish to print only the totals for each card type on the report, press the key

(YES).

If you wish to print information on each transaction individually as well as totals for the report, press the key (NO).

Note: Press the key if you are printing a Transactions List for the End-of-Day procedure.

Note: Select the key if you wish to determine which transactions were processed using a chip card. On the report, the word "CHIP" will appear on the same line as the card name if a chip card was inserted for that transaction.

The terminal prints the report then returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

9.14 Transaction Inquiry Report

This report lists all transactions that match the criteria you select. If you do not select any criteria (i.e. you simply press the key as each criteria appears), all transactions in the terminal memory are listed.

Criteria are:

• Clerk ID

• Card Type

• Card Number

• Amount

• Type of Transaction

• Date of Transaction

The results can be printed or displayed on the terminal screen.

Note: Visa Debit transactions may appear under "VISA" on the report (i.e., there may be no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key on the keypad.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down and select REPORTS.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down and select TRANS INQUIRY.

The SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 211

9 Reports

4. Swipe the POS Admin card , or simply press the

key.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

The criteria appear in order:

5. The list of card types appears, beginning with ALL CARDS.

To select all card types, ensure ALL CARDS is highlight then press the key.

OR

To select a specific card type, scroll down the list until the card type you wish to select is highlighted then press the key.

6. The CARD NUMBER prompt appears.

To select all Card numbers, simply press the key.

OR

To select a specific card, key in the Card number and press the key.

7. The ENTER AMOUNT entry screen appears.

To select all transactions regardless of amount, simply press the key.

OR

To select transactions of a specific amount, key in the amount and press the key.

8. The list of transaction types appears, beginning with ALL TRANS.

To select all transaction types, ensure ALL TRANS in highlighted then press the

key.

OR

To select a specific transaction type (e.g. Refunds), scroll through the list until the transaction type you wish to select is highlighted then press the key.

9. The DATE (YY) MMDD prompt appears.

To select all transactions regardless of the date they were processed, simply press the

key.

OR

To select transactions processed on a specific date, key in the date in the format indicated on the screen (the 2-digit year is optional) and press the key.

10. The PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears.

To print the list of matching transactions, refer to "Transaction Inquiry - Printed

Report".

To print a duplicate of the Merchant copy of a receipt, refer to "Transaction Inquiry -

Reprint the Merchant copy".

To delete a Pre-Authorization transaction, refer to "Transaction Inquiry - Delete a Pre-

Authorization".

212 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

9 Reports

9.14.1 Printing a Transaction Inquiry Report

Begin a Transaction Inquiry then, when the PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears:

A. Press the key to select PRINT.

The terminal searches its memory for matching transactions.

B. The terminal displays PRINTING while the report is printed.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

The terminal returns to the READY prompt.

9.14.2 Transaction Inquiry - Reprinting the Merchant Receipt Copy

Begin a Transaction Inquiry then, when the PRINT OR DISPLAY? prompt appears:

A. Press the key to select DISPLAY.

The terminal searches its memory for matching transactions.

B. The Trans Inquiry Menu displays the matching transactions on the screen, one transaction per line.

To select a particular transaction, scroll through the list until the transaction is highlighted then press the key.

TRANS INQUIRY

TTNNNN $999.99

TTNNNN $999.99

TTNNNN $999.99

TT = Transaction Type:

P = Purchase

GP = Gift Purchase

R = Refund

RF = Gift/Loyalty Refund

RD = Loyalty Redemption

PA = Pre-Authorization

A = Advice

VP = Void Purchase

VR = Void Refund

V = Gift/Loyalty Void

Y = Payment

VY = Void Payment

AL = Gift/Loyalty Activate/Load

DA = Gift/Loyalty Deactivate

NNNN = last 4 digits of the Card number

999.99 = last 5 digits of the transaction amount

C. Detailed information about the selected transaction appears.

To print a duplicate of the Merchant copy of the receipt, press the key (REPRINT).

To return to the Trans Inquiry Menu

, press the key (NEXT).

TRANS INQUIRY

CCCCCCCCCCC XXXX

TT $999,999.99

NEXT REPRINT

CCCCCCCCCCC = last 11 digits of the Card number

XXXX:

- for Credit (including some debit chip cards) and gift/loyalty cards = transaction date

- for Debit = CHQ or SAV

TT = Transaction Type (see above)

999,999.99 = transaction amount

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 213

9 Reports

D. The terminal prints the Merchant copy of the receipt (with a signature line if it was present

on the original receipt) and returns to the Trans Inquiry menu

.

To select another transaction to reprint, scroll through the list until the transaction is highlighted then press the key.

To return to the READY screen, press the key repeatedly.

214 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

10 End-of-Day Procedure

If your merchant account is set up for Merchant Close settlement, you must process a Batch

Close transaction in order to have the funds from your POS transactions deposited to your business account. If your merchant account is set up for

System Close settlement, Moneris

automatically closes your batch for you at the end of each day. You must verify transaction totals on a daily basis.

10.1 Merchant Close

IMPORTANT: At the end of each business day you must process a Close Batch transaction in order to have the funds from your POS transactions deposited to your business account.

You will need to perform three tasks:

Task 1: Perform a debit/credit Stored Transactions report by batch on the terminal to be

closed.

Task 2: Perform a debit/credit Close Batch

for a single terminal OR

If

Multi-Terminal Reporting is enabled , a

Multi-Terminal Report for a group of named

terminals.

Task 3: Compare the totals on the two reports.

Note: If the debit/credit totals do not match, call the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for

reconciliation assistance.

If a Moneris Gift/Loyalty program is enabled on your terminal, at the end of each of the

aforementioned debit/credit reports the PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

prompt appears.

If you wish to print the equivalent gift/loyalty report and close the gift/loyalty batch immediately following the debit/credit operations: Press the key to select YES when the PRINT ERNEX REPORT? prompt or CLOSE ERNEX BATCH? prompt appears respectively.

If you wish instead to close the gift/loyalty batch separately from the debit/credit batch, you will have to print the gift/loyalty Stored Transactions report and then close the

gift/loyalty batch from the Ernex REPORT FUNCS menu

.

Note: If gift/loyalty totals do not match, call the Moneris Merchant Service Centre

(i.e.,

Merchant Customer Service) for reconciliation assistance.

If the Air Miles Rewards program is enabled on your terminal, reward transactions are saved on the terminal then forwarded to the Moneris Host in small groups. You do not need to process an administrative transaction in order to close Air Miles transactions. It is recommended, however, that you check at the end of the day to ensure all Air Miles Rewards transactions have been forwarded to the Moneris Host.

A. Check the REWARDS MENU to see if the SAF INQUIRY transaction appears.

• If it does not, all transactions have been forwarded.

• If it does, perform an

UPLOAD SAF transaction.

B. Print a

Reward Daily Totals report for your records.

Note: You may wish to enable the ARE TOTALS BALANCED? prompt to appear during a

Close Batch to remind you to perform Task 3.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 215

10 End-of-Day Procedure

10.2 System Close

You will need to perform three tasks:

Task 1: Print a

Stored Transactions

on the terminal to be closed.

Task 2: Print a

Merchant Subtotals Report.

Note: The Merchant Subtotals report must be printed before 11:00 p.m. local time.

Task 3: Compare the totals on the two reports: Confirm that the totals on the Stored

Transactions report (printed in Task 1) match the totals on the Merchant Subtotals report

(printed in Task 2). If they do not match, call the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for

reconciliation assistance.

10.3 Close Batch

Chip card totals are rolled into the card totals, not a separate card type

Note: Refer to " Multi-Terminal Reporting

" to close multiple terminals at one time.

Refer to "

Current Batch Totals Report " to print the report without closing the batch.

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Press the key to select CLOSE BATCH.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the

POS Admin card

.

If the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen appears, refer to the "Entering the Clerk ID"

procedure.

Note: If this prompt appears, you must enter the Clerk ID even if the Default Clerk ID feature has been enabled.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then prints the CURRENT BATCH

TOTALS report.

The CLOSE BATCH? prompt appears.

4. Press the key (YES) to close the current batch and have funds deposited to your account.

Note: If you press the key (NO), the Close Batch will be cancelled and funds will not be deposited to your account. If you perform the Close Batch again later and press the key

(YES), the funds will be deposited at that time.

If enabled

, the ARE TOTALS BALANCED? prompt appears. a. Confirm that the totals on the CURRENT BATCH TOTALS report match the totals on the TERMINAL BATCH TOTALS report (printed from the

Print Stored

Transactions report).

b. If the totals do not match,

contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre the next

business day for reconciliation assistance.

216 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

10 End-of-Day Procedure

5. The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host again, finishes printing the report, and returns to the READY screen.

If the

PRINT ERNEX REPORT?

appears, refer to the "Printing a Gift/Loyalty Report

after a Financial Report" procedure.

10.4 Multi-terminal Reports

10.4.1 Multi-Terminal Report for All Terminals

This function does not compare totals stored in the terminal memory to totals stored on the

Moneris Host. Therefore, ensure your receipts balance to the total of the Deposit Totals

Report (selected in step 5) or print a

stored Transactions List report on each of the terminals

selected.

Note: You can also perform a Multi-Terminal Report for a group of terminals

or one or more terminals by name .

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM RPT, and press the key.

The CLOSE BATCHES? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

4. To close the batch on the selected terminal, press the key (YES).

To skip closing the batch for that terminal, press the key (NO).

The GET DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompt appears.

5. To print the Deposit Totals report for the selected terminal, press the key (YES).

To skip printing the report for that terminal, press the key (NO).

Note: If you press the key (NO) for both the CLOSE BATCHES? and the GET

DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompts, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

The MULT TERM menu appears.

6. Scroll down to ALL TERMINALS, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then, if the Deposit Totals report was requested in step 5, displays PRINTING while it prints the report and returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 217

10 End-of-Day Procedure

10.4.2 Multi-Terminal Report for One or More Terminals by Name

This function does not compare totals stored in the terminal memory to totals stored on the

Moneris Host. Therefore, ensure your receipts balance to the total of the Deposit Totals

Report (selected in step 5) or print a

stored Transactions List report on each of the terminals

selected.

Note: You can also perform a Multi-Terminal report for all terminals

or a

group of terminals .

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

IMPORTANT: You must know the terminal name in order to perform this function for one terminal.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM RPT, and press the key.

The CLOSE BATCHES? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

4. To close the batch on the selected terminal, press the key (YES).

To skip closing the batch for that terminal, press the key (NO).

The GET DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompt appears.

5. To print the Deposit Totals Report for the selected terminal, press the key (YES).

To skip printing the report for that terminal, press the key (NO).

Note: If you press the key (NO) for both the CLOSE BATCHES? and the GET

DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompts, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

The MULT TERM menu appears.

6. Press the key to select NAME.

The ENTER TERM NAME TO BE PROCESSED entry screen appears.

7. Key in the terminal name and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering Alphabetic

Characters and Punctuation ".)

The MULT TERM menu appears indicating that 1 terminal is pending (i.e. MULT TERM [01

PEND]).

To select additional terminals by name, repeat steps 6 and 7.

When you have selected all the terminals you wish, go to step 8.

Note: You may select up to 20 terminals by name to process at one time. When you enter the twentieth terminal name, the terminal automatically processes the list then returns to the

MULT TERM menu . You can then add additional terminals.

8. Scroll down to PROCESS LIST, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then, if the Deposit Totals report was requested in step 5, displays PRINTING while it prints the report and returns to the READY screen.

218 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

10 End-of-Day Procedure

10.4.3 Multi-Terminal Report for One or More Groups of Terminals

This function does not compare totals stored in the terminal memory to totals stored on the

Moneris Host. Therefore, ensure your receipts balance to the total of the Deposit Totals report

(selected in step 5) or print a stored Transactions List report

on each of the terminals selected.

Note: You can also perform a Multi-Terminal Report for all terminals or

one or more terminals by name .

Note: Visa Debit transactions are included in "VISA" totals on the report (i.e., there is no distinction between Visa credit and debit transactions).

Note: Flash transactions are included in "INTERAC" totals on the report.

IMPORTANT: You must know the Terminal Group ID in order to perform this function for a group of terminals.

From the READY screen:

1. Press the key.

The MAIN MENU appears.

2. Scroll down to REPORTS, and press the key.

The REPORT FUNCS menu appears.

3. Scroll down to MULTI TERM RPT, and press the key.

The CLOSE BATCHES? prompt appears.

If the SWIPE ADMIN CARD prompt appears, swipe the POS Admin card.

4. To close the batch on the selected terminal, the key (YES).

To skip closing the batch for that terminal, press the key (NO).

The GET DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompt appears.

5. To print the Deposit Totals Report for the selected terminal, press the key (YES).

To skip printing the report for that terminal, press the key (NO).

Note: If you press the key (NO) for both the CLOSE BATCHES? and the GET

DEPOSIT TOTALS? prompts, the terminal returns to the READY screen.

The MULT TERM menu appears.

6. Scroll down to GROUP, and press the key.

The ENTER GROUP ID TO BE PROCESSED entry screen appears.

7. Key in the Terminal Group ID, and press the key. (Refer to "

Entering Alphabetic

Characters and Punctuation ".)

The MULT TERM menu appears indicating that 1 Group ID is pending (i.e. MULT TERM

[01 PEND]).

To select additional terminals by Group ID, repeat steps 6 and 7.

When you have selected all the groups you wish, go to step 8.

Note: You may select up to 20 Group IDs to process at one time. When you enter the

twentieth Group ID, the terminal automatically processes the list then returns to the MULT

TERM menu . You can then add additional groups.

8. Scroll down to PROCESS LIST, and press the key.

The terminal communicates with the Moneris Host then, if the Deposit Totals report was requested in step 5, displays PRINTING while it prints the report and returns to the READY screen.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 219

11 Troubleshooting

Assistance can be accessed in a number of ways. You may:

Refer to other Moneris iwl220 documentation

Call the Moneris Merchant Contact Centre

Use the Merchant Direct Secure Message Centre

11.1 Additional Documentation

To download a copy of the Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Using Your Terminal guide:

1. Visit: moneris.com/guides

2. Click on the link "iWL220 Short-Range Mobile v2.16 Reference Guide"

To download a printable PDF file of this Operating Manual:

1. Visit: moneris.com/manuals

2. Click on the link "iWL220 Short-Range Mobile v2.16 Operating Manual"

To download a copy of the Merchant Operating Manual:

1. visit: moneris.com/manuals

2. Click on the link "Merchant Operating Manual"

11.2 Telephone Assistance

WHEN YOU NEED:

+ to order stationery supplies and printer

rolls

+ to resolve balancing issues

+ to solve problems with your terminal

+ to report a Code 10 situation

+ to change your terminal configuration

+

Voice Authorizations

CONTACT:

Moneris Merchant

Service Centre

1-866-319-7450 toll-free

24 hours a day, 7 days a week

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 221

11 Troubleshooting

11.3 Merchant Direct

Log in to Merchant Direct, and use the Message Centre to send a secure message directly to the Moneris Merchant Service Centre.

1. Visit moneris.com/mymerchantdirect for more information.

11.4 Troubleshooting

If your terminal is not working properly and an error message appears on the screen, go to the

list of Error Messages

and locate the message you see on the terminal. If the problem appears to be with the hardware, go to the list of

Hardware Problems

and locate the symptom. Then, review the possible problems and try the suggested solution.

Note: Please keep any receipts printed during problem transactions. The Service Centre representative may require information that appears on the receipts.

IMPORTANT: If you are using PUBLIC IP communications, you may need to contact your ISP for assistance before contacting Moneris. Check the Error Message or

Hardware Problem resolution to determine if this is the case.

If this does not resolve the problem, contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

11.5 Error Messages on the iWL220 Terminal

A message will appear on the display if an error occurs. In the table below, find the error message that appears on the terminal and try the solution. If the error message re-appears,

contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

IMPORTANT: If you are using PUBLIC IP communication, you may need to contact your ISP for assistance before contacting Moneris. Check the Error Message resolution to determine if this is the case.

All error messages are listed in alphabetical order (regardless of their cause).

ERROR MESSAGE PROBLEM & SOLUTION

= SAF Log 90% Full

This icon appears in the top left corner of the terminal display

(MAIN MENU, TRANSACTIONS, REPORT FUNCS,

ADMIN FUNCS, and CONFIG FUNCS menus) when there is a problem with the Ethernet connection.

If a dial cable is connected to the base, the terminal will attempt to use dial communication.

Check that your Internet service is available.

- If it is not available, contact your ISP.

- If it is available, contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

This icon appears on the following menus when the SAF log is nearly full: MAIN MENU, TRANSACTIONS, REPORT

FUNCS, ADMIN FUNCS, and CONFIG FUNCS.

A

manual SAF Upload transaction should be performed as soon

as possible.

222 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

= SAF Log is

100% Full

(TRAINING)

= Training Mode

AMOUNT EXCEEDED

RETURN TO CLERK

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

This icon appears on the following menus when the SAF log is full: MAIN MENU, TRANSACTIONS, REPORT FUNCS,

ADMIN FUNCS, and CONFIG FUNCS.

The next time the terminal returns to the READY screen, it will perform an automatic

SAF Upload

. No other transactions (Air

Miles, debit, credit or Ernex) can be processed until the SAF

Upload has been successfully completed.

Wait while the terminal performs the

SAF Upload

.

Do NOT cancel the

SAF Upload

. It must be completed before any other transactions can be performed.

This text appears on the READY screen when the terminal is in

Training mode.

Exit Training mode to remove the text from the display.

This icon appears on the following menus when the terminal is in Training mode: MAIN MENU, TRANSACTIONS, REPORT

FUNCS, ADMIN FUNCS, and CONFIG FUNCS.

Exit Training mode to remove the icon from the display.

The Refund Amount entered exceeds the limit set on the terminal during Initialization.

- Ask the cardholder to return the terminal.

- Press the key to display the merchant prompts.

- The

REFUND LIMIT EXCEEDED

prompt appears.

APP CA06

ASSERT

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

CANCELLED

REMOVE CARD

CANCELLED

RETURN TO CLERK

The key was pressed during a chip card transaction:

- Remove the chip card from the chip card reader. The terminal will beep once per second until the card is removed.

- If receipts had begun printing before the card was removed,

CARD REMOVED and CANCELLED are printed on the receipt.

- The READY screen appears.

The cardholder has pressed the key during the cardholder prompts.

- Ask the cardholder to return the terminal.

- Press the key to display the merchant prompts.

- Retry the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 223

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

CANNOT SWIPE

CHIP CARD

PRESS OK

CARD BLOCKED

REMOVE CARD

CARD NOT

SUPPORTED or

CARD NOT

SUPPORTED

PLEASE RETRY

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

A chip card was swiped on the magnetic stripe card reader; however, this is not allowed for this card.

- Press the key to return the READY screen

- Request another form of payment.

The chip card that you inserted cannot be used.

There are a number of possible problems:

- You have keyed in or swiped a credit or debit or gift/loyalty card that is not valid. Check that the cardholder has activated the card with their financial institution.

- You have keyed in or swiped a card at the SWIPE ADMIN

CARD prompt that is not a POS Admin card. Check the card to ensure that it is a POS Admin Card.

- You have keyed in a credit card or debit chip card or gift card/loyalty number that is not valid. Check that you have keyed in the card number exactly as it appears on the card.

- During a Payment or Payment Void transaction, you have keyed in or swiped a card at the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt that is not a Private Label card. Check the card to ensure that it is a Private Label card.

Check the card (or Card number) then:

If the READY screen appears, retry the transaction.

If the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears, swipe (or key in) the card again.

You may need to swipe the card more quickly or more slowly or from the front of the reader back to read it properly.

If this message appears again:

- For a credit card that was swiped: try the transaction again, but key in the Card number

- For a keyed in credit Card number or a debit card: cancel the transaction and request another form of payment.

- For a private label card: cancel the transaction.

Direct the cardholder to report the problem to their card issuer.

224 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

CARD PROBLEM or

CARD PROBLEM

PLEASE RETRY

CARD REMOVED

RETURN TO CLERK

CARD REMOVED

PRESS OK

CASH BACK

EXCEEDS LIMIT

OR

CASH BACK

LIMIT EXCEEDED

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

You have swiped a card on the terminal's magnetic stripe reader and the card stripe could not be read properly.

If the READY screen appears, retry the transaction. If the

SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears, try swiping the card more quickly or more slowly or from the front of the reader back.

If this is a contactless transaction: The reader could not read all of the information that it required, or there is more than one contactless card within range of the reader.

1. Hold the card by itself in front of the reader for 3 to 5 seconds until the reader beeps. Try this step twice more if it doesn't work the first time.

2. If step 1 doesn’t work, try inserting the card into the chip reader if the card is also a chip card.

3. If step 2 doesn’t work, try swiping the card on the terminal.

4. If step 3 doesn’t work, manually enter the card number, or use an alternative form of payment.

The chip card was removed from the chip card reader during the cardholder prompts, before the REMOVE CARD prompt was displayed.

The transaction is cancelled.

- Retrieve the terminal from the cardholder.

- Wait until the CARD REMOVED PRESS OK

prompt appears.

The chip card was removed before the transaction was completed and has been cancelled.

- Press the key.

- The CARD REMOVED prompt appears while the receipts are printed.

- CARD REMOVED and CANCELLED are printed on the receipt.

- The READY screen appears.

The Cashback amount requested exceeds the limit set on the terminal.

Enter a lower amount for Cashback when the prompt re-appears.

If this error message appears on a regular basis, consider

increasing the Cashback limit set on the terminal.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 225

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

CHECK PRINTER

CHIP NOT ALLOWED

DO PURCHASE

PRESS OK

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

problem has been detected with the printer.

Open the printer and check that: - there is paper in the printer - the paper feed is clear. - the paper roll is seated correctly. Close the printer lid and ensure that it is closed completely.

If the problem is fixed: The printer will finish printing the receipt or report that was in progress and complete the transaction.

If the problem is not fixed:

Press the key. The terminal will complete the transaction.

Fix the problem then reprint

the transaction.

Transactions should not be performed until the printer problem is fixed.

- Press the key again to return to the READY screen.

- Process a

Purchase using the Chip card

OR

- request another credit card and retry the

Pre-Authorization .

CHIP NOT ALLOWED

DO PURCHASE

REMOVE CARD

CHIP NOT ALLOWED

DO PURCHASE

RETURN TO CLERK

CHIP TYPE

NOT SUPPORTED

REMOVE CARD

A chip card has been used to attempt a Pre-Authorization transaction and the terminal is not configured to allow this.

If this appears during merchant prompts:

- You remove the chip card

- Press the key to return to the READY screen.

If this message appears during the cardholder prompts:

- the cardholder removes the card. - The CHIP NOT

ALLOWED DO PURCHASE RETURN TO CLERK prompt appears.

The cardholder passes the terminal back to you.

- Press the key. THE CHIP NOT ALLOWED DO

PURCHASE PRESS OK prompt appears.

- Press the key again to return to the READY screen.

- Process a

Purchase using the Chip card

OR

- request another credit card and retry the

Pre-Authorization .

The chip on the chip card cannot be used on this terminal.

- Remove the chip card.

- The SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears.

- Swipe the chip card on the magnetic stripe card reader to start

the transaction.

226 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

CLERK ID NOT

SETUP

PRESS OK

CUSTOMER -

INSERT CARD

INTO READER

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The Default Clerk ID has not been set. the key to return to the READY screen.

If you wish to use a Default Clerk ID,

add the Default Clerk ID .

OR If you wish to use a number of Clerk IDs, change the

prompt for Clerk ID to YES .

A chip card was swiped on the Magnetic Stripe Card Reader instead of inserted into the chip card reader.

Insert the card into the chip card reader to start the transaction.

DECLINED... See .

DO A PURCHASE

WITH CHIP CARD

DUPLICATE

TERMINAL NAME

ERROR 401

COMM ERROR

ERROR 402

HOST DISCONNECT

The chip card cannot be used for a Pre-Auth transaction because the terminal is not configured to allow this. Retrieve the terminal, remove the chip card, pressthe key, and perform a

Purchase using the chip card.

The chip card cannot be used for a Pre-Auth transaction because the terminal is not configured to allow this.

Retrieve the terminal, remove the chip card, press the key, and perform a credit Purchase using the chip card.

The terminal name you have attempted to assign to this terminal is already assigned to another one of your terminals.

Try keying in another terminal name.

OR

To assign the terminal name to this terminal, first delete it from

the other terminal then assign it to this one.

An unknown communication error has occurred.

Press the key to return to the READY screen and try the transaction again.

If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The Host has dropped the connection to the terminal during a transaction.

Press the key to return to the READY screen and try the transaction again.

If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 227

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

ERROR 403

CONNECTION LOST

ERROR 405

NO ENQ FROM HOST

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The terminal has lost the connection to the Host during a transaction.

Press the key to return to the READY screen and try the transaction again.

If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

ERROR 406

NO NETWORK RESP

ERROR 407

ACK NOT SENT

ETHERNET COMMS

ERROR-DIAL USED

PRESS OK

The terminal has sent the transaction request to the Host but the

Host has not responded.

Press the key to return to the READY screen and try the transaction again.

If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The application did not send the final message to the Moneris

Host. The transaction is considered cancelled.

- Press the key.

- If a chip card was used in the transaction, remove the chip card.

- Any receipts finish printing with CANCELLED on them.

- The READY screen appears.

The terminal was unable to communicate with the Moneris Host

over the Ethernet connection and dial backup was used to

process the transaction.

Press the key to acknowledge the message and return to the

READY screen.

The terminal will revert to Ethernet communication for the next transaction.

228 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

ETHERNET DOWN

PRESS OK

GIFT CARD

MUST BE SWIPED

HOST CONNECTION

FAILED

INCORRECT PIN --

LAST RETRY

PRESS OK

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The terminal has checked the Ethernet connection and determined that it is unavailable for communication.

Press the key to return the READY screen then check the following:

- Check all the cables to ensure everything is plugged in tightly.

- Check that the router and hub/switch (if any) are functioning.

If you use Public Internet: Contact your ISP (Internet service provider) for assistance.

If you use Private Internet: Call the Moneris Merchant

Service Centre.

If you use Corporate WAN: Call your corporate help desk to confirm that the Corporate WAN is functioning properly.

Note: This error message may include the text BASE NOT

FOUND if the terminal determines that the Ethernet is

unavailable and then checks for the base but cannot find the base. If this message appears, the base may not be powered.

Confirm that the power cable is connected to the base.

You have tried to key in a gift card number for a transaction that does not support manual entry.

Swipe the gift card on the Magnetic Stripe Card reader to

continue.

The terminal attempted to communicate with the Moneris Host but failed. The terminal will display this message for 3 seconds then return to the previous prompt.

Wait for a few minutes, and then try the transaction again. If the message reappears, do the following:

3. If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant

Service Centre for assistance.

The cardholder has not entered the correct PIN, i.e. (the PIN entered does not match the PIN on the card). The cardholder can retry entering their PIN correctly one last time.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 229

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

INCORRECT PIN

PRESS OK

INCREMENTS OF 10

DOLLARS, PLEASE

INITIALIZATION

ERROR

PLEASE WAIT

INITIALIZATION

ERROR

RETRYING TRANS

INITIALIZATION

FAILED, CONTACT

SERVICE CENTRE

INITIALIZATION

FAILED, MERCHANT

ID ERROR

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The PIN entered does not match the PIN on the card.

- The cardholder presses the key.

- The ENTER PIN & OK prompt re-appears.

- The cardholder re-enters their PIN correctly to continue the transaction.

For chip cards with PIN: If the cardholder cannot remember their PIN the card may approve the transaction or the terminal may prompt for a signature at the end of the transaction or the transaction may be cancelled. If the transaction was cancelled, request another form of payment.

For debit cards: If the debit cardholder cannot remember their

PIN, the transaction cannot be completed. Ask for another form of payment.

The Cashback

amount that was entered is not a rounded amount

(i.e., there must be no cents included, and the dollar position must be zero).

Key in a Cashback amount like $10 or $20 or $30 or $40, etc.

Please wait while the terminal is re-establishes an Ethernet connection to the Host in order to retry the initialization.

When the connection is established, the INITIALIZATION

ERROR RETRYING TRANSACTION prompt appears.

If the Initialization process is not successful because of a communication problem, the terminal will automatically retry the Initialization once.

Please wait while the terminal retries the Initialization.

This message is displayed until the Initialization retry is successfully under way or the retry fails and a new error message is displayed.

There has been a terminal, host or communication problem during the Initialization.

Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

The Merchant ID entered during the Initialization was not correct.

- Press the key to return to the READY screen

- Check the Merchant ID.

- Retry the Initialization.

If the Merchant ID was entered correctly and the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

230 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

INITIALIZATION

FAILED

RETRYING TRANS

INITIALIZE

ERNEX

INIT FAILED-###

CALL HELP CENTRE

PRESS OK

INIT REQ'D

INSUFFICIENT

POINTS FOR

REDEMPTION

INVALID CARD NO.

INVALID CARD

TYPE

INVALID DATE

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

If the Initialization process is not successful, the terminal will automatically retry the Initialization once.

Please wait while the terminal retries the Initialization.

This message is displayed until the Initialization retry is successfully under way or the retry fails and a new error message is displayed.

The Moneris Host is requesting a re-initialization of the

terminal.

Re-initialize for Ernex.

There has been a parameter error during the Initialization. ### indicates the specific error.

- Record the 3-digit number that appears where the ### is in this example.

- Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

The Moneris Host is requesting a re-initialization of the

terminal.

Re-initialize the terminal.

There are not enough points on the card to redeem the number of loyalty points requested.

Perform a gift/loyalty

Card Inquiry to obtain the balance on the

card then retry the Redemption with a valid number of points.

The swiped card failed the MOD 10 check.

If the READY screen appears, retry the transaction.

If the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears, try swiping the card again.

If this message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The card that was swiped cannot be used for this transaction.

Ask for another card (e.g. a credit card) and retry the transaction.

Try swiping the card again. If this message reappears, press the

key to cancel the transaction and retry the

debit or credit

transaction.

The date entered is not a valid date.

The date must be entered in the MMDD or YYMMDD format and must be a valid calendar date, e.g. 0231 (Feb. 31) is not a valid date.

Check the date and re-enter it when the prompt re-appears.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 231

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

INVALID ENTRY

Invalid Expiry Date

INVALID

EXPIRY DATE

PLEASE RETRY

INVALID IP

ADDRESS

INVALID PASSWORD

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

While in Training mode you have attempted to enter a transaction amount, a Cashback amount or a Tip amount greater than $1.00.

When the prompt reappears, key in an amount of $1.00 or less and press the key to continue.

OR

The information you have entered for the gift/loyalty transaction is not valid. Check the information and retry.

Note: This message will also appear (Enhanced Loyalty program or Pro Loyalty program) if you entered a benefit amount (e.g., may be called "pre-tax" or something different if your setup is customized) that is greater than the total transaction amount.

OR

The Air Miles Reward incentive you entered was greater than

0.99. Check the value and re-enter a value equal to or less than

0.99.

The gift card that you entered has passed its expiry date.

Request another gift card.

Note: The expired card and its balance cannot be used again nor can the balance be transferred to another card.

The 4-digit Expiry date entered is not a valid date.

Check the date and re-enter it when the prompt re-appears.

The date must be entered in the MMDD format and must be a valid calendar date, e.g., 0231 (Feb. 31) is not a valid date.

The IP address entered does not match the standard IP address format of #.#.#.# where each # can be a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 3 digits long with a minimum value of 0 and a maximum value of 255. For example:

0.10.127.255

Check the IP Address and re-enter it when the prompt reappears.

The password entered does not match the password downloaded.

INVALID PHONE #

Invalid Redemption

Points/Amount

The number that was keyed in is not the correct length.

Key in a 10-digit phone number (including the area code but without any spaces).

You have entered a redemption value that is outside the minimum or maximum value allowable for your loyalty program.

232 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

INVALID

TAG LIST

INVALID TIME

LOW BATTERY!!!

DOCK TERMINAL

MAC FAILURE

PRESS OK

Matching Transaction

Not Found

MAXIMUM BONUS

EXCEEDED

MERCHANT ID

ERROR

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

The time entered is not a valid time.

The time must be entered in the HHMM format and must be a valid time (HH must be from 00 to 23 and MM must be from 00 to 59.)

Check the time and re-enter it when the prompt re-appears.

The battery charge is at a critically low level. The terminal will

beep 3 times then power off .

To continue performing transactions:

- Dock the terminal on a powered

base

)

Note: The terminal must remain within range of the communications base to which it is registered, regardless of which base on which it is docked. For example, if the terminal is registered to "comms base 1" but placed on "charge-only base

A" because of a low battery then "charge-only base A" must be located within range of "comms base 1" to allow the terminal to communicate with "comms base 1."

The terminal was unable to initialize to the Moneris Host.

Press the key. The terminal may automatically attempt another initialization or may simply return to the READY screen.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

A gift/loyalty transaction matching the Reference number you entered could be found. Check the number and try again.

The multiplier was applied to the 10th Bonus Offer selected for the transaction and this has resulted in an 11th Bonus Offer.

There is a maximum 10 bonus offers per transaction so this exceeds the maximum.

The terminal returns to the

Bonus Offer menu

screen.

Select the Bonus Offer again, but press the key to select NO at the APPLY MULTIPLIER prompt.

The Merchant ID entered does not match the Merchant ID in the terminal's configuration.

Check the ID, and re-enter it when the prompt re-appears.

If the Merchant ID was entered correctly and the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 233

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

MISMATCHED

NO ACTIVITY

NO LINE DETECTED

NO SUPPORTED

APPLICATIONS

REMOVE CARD

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

During a swiped credit card transaction, the digits entered as the last four of the credit card do not match the last four digits of the card number encoded on the card's magnetic stripe.

Check the Card number and re-enter the last four digits when the prompt re-appears.

If the prompt reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

Clerk Subtotals are not available for that Clerk ID OR That

Clerk ID does not exist.

Check the Clerk ID and try the report again.

The terminal cannot detect an available communications line so will not begin communicating.

For dial communications, this may happen if the terminal shares the dial line with another device (e.g. a phone or a fax machine) or is using a line splitter or filter.- Ensure that all communications cables are connected to the base and the wall jack correctly.

- Check the phone line to ensure there is a dial tone.

- If the line is shared with another device or uses a dial splitter or filter, ensure that the other device is not in use and has disconnected correctly.

- Press the key to return to the READY screen.

For IP communications: the Internet service or the router may be down.

- Ensure that all communications cables are connected to the base and the wall jack correctly.

- Check that the Internet service is functioning, e.g. access a website from a PC.

For wireless communications: the wireless connection may not be functioning properly.

If the dial or IP communications seem to be working, reset the wireless communications:

-

Power down the communications base

then

power it up again.

- If the message appears again, remove the battery for 10 seconds then place it back on the handheld.

The applications available on the terminal do not match any of the applications on the chip card.

- If the chip card was inserted into the chip reader, remove the

card. Swipe the chip card on the magnetic stripe card reader

to continue the transaction

If the card was tapped, insert it into the chip reader; otherwise, swipe it on the magnetic stripe reader.

234 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

No Totals Available

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

No gift/loyalty transactions have been processed since the last gift/loyalty Batch Close.

NOT ACCEPTED

REMOVE CARD

NOT COMPLETED

PLEASE TRY AGAIN or

NOT COMPLETED

RETURN TO CLERK

The chip card inserted cannot be read

OR

A card-to-terminal communication error occurred.

- Remove the chip card.

If the SWIPE OR INSERT CARD prompt appears:

- re-insert the chip card to retry the transaction.

If the PURCHASE Ready screen appears:

- restart the transaction

If the SWIPE CARD prompt appears:

- Swipe the chip card on the magnetic stripe card reader to continue

If the NOT ACCEPTED message reappears:

- Remove the chip card.

- Request another form of payment.

The terminal has encountered a communication error during the cardholder prompts.

If the cardholder is swiping or inserting the card:

- Ask the cardholder to return the terminal.

- Press the key to display the merchant prompts.

- If communication error message appears, fine the error message in this table and follow the instructions.

OPTION

NOT AVAILABLE

PERFORM ADM 60

PRINT CASHBACK

INFO, PRESS OK

PIN MUST BE

4 TO 12 DIGITS

The Admin code entered does not exist or the function has not been configured on this terminal.

Check the Admin Shortcut Code and try again.

The terminal is about to erase from its memory a transaction that includes a Cashback amount and has not been printed on a

Stored Transactions List.

- Press the key.

- Print a Stored Transaction List .

- Retry the transaction.

The cardholder has entered a PIN that was too short (less than 4 digits) or too long (more than 12 digits).

When the ENTER PIN prompt reappears:

- Ask the cardholder to enter the PIN again.

- Remind them that they must key in at least four digits (i.e. at least four asterisks **** appear on the display) but no more than

12 digits before pressing the key.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 235

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

PIN TRIES

EXCEEDED

REMOVE CARD

PLEASE LOGON

REFER CALL

Refund Amount

Greater Than

Original

REFUND LIMIT

EXCEEDED

PRESS OK

REINITIALIZATION

REQUIRED

REMOVE CARD

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The cardholder keyed in an incorrect PIN too many times in a row for this transaction. The transaction is declined.

- If the REMOVE CARD message appears under the PIN

RETRIES EXCEEDED message, remove the chip card from the chip card reader.

- Press the key.

- Request an alternate form of payment.

The terminal has been

logged off to protect it from attempts to

perform unauthorized transactions.

Perform a Logon transaction.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre to obtain a voice

authorization. Once authorized, process an Advice Transaction

.

The dollar amount you have entered for a gift/loyalty Refund is greater than the amount in the original Purchase transaction.

Press the key, and retry the Refund with the correct amount.

The Refund Amount entered exceeds the limit set on the terminal during Initialization.

Press the key twice then retry the Refund for a lower amount.

For Chip Card Refunds: Remove the card then press the

key

Check the amount of the Refund. If it is greater than the limit, cancel the Refund on the terminal.

The total value of Refunds performed today is greater than your daily Refund limit. Contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for a temporary increase. Please have the original

Purchase receipt available for reference to discuss increasing your Refund limit.

The First Initialization

attempt failed

OR

The Moneris Host has sent a Re-initialization request to the terminal

OR

An item of the Host Setup for (Ethernet parameter)has been changed on the terminal.

Try to re-initialize again.

A chip card has been left in the chip card reader after the transaction was completed. The terminal will beep once per second until the card is removed.

Remove the chip card from the chip card reader. The Idle prompt will appear on the screen.

236 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

RETRY - SYSTEM

PROBLEM ###

RETRY - SYSTEM

TIME OUT ###

RETRY TERMINAL

TIME-OUT

PRESS OK

RETRY

TRANSACTION?

YES NO

REWARD EXCEEDS

LIMIT

SAF UPLOAD

FAILED

SAF UPLOAD

REQUIRED

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The Moneris Host was unable to process the transaction.

Retry the transaction.

If problem persists, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The Moneris Host or the Third Party Host was unable to process the transaction.

Retry the transaction.

If the problem persists, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The customer has taken too long to enter their PIN.

- Press the key.

- The terminal will print the receipt(s) including a NOT

COMPLETED message then the RETRY TRANSACTION?

prompt appears.

Press the key to select YES and retry the transaction. The

CUSTOMER PRESS OK TO CONTINUE prompt appears.

Pass the terminal back to the customer and ask them to press the

key then re-enter their debit card information.

Press the key to select NO and return to the READY screen.

The total awards calculated for this Air Miles Rewards Purchase

or Air Miles Rewards Refund are greater than the maximum reward limit configured on the terminal.

The READY screen re-appears.

Check the values entered during the Rewards transaction and retry the transaction.

The SAF Upload

attempt (automatic during a transaction or manually started from the terminal menus) was not completed.

Press the key.

If this was an automatic SAF upload attempted during a transaction (Close Batch or Multi-terminal Reporting), the transaction is cancelled then the READY screen appears.

If this was a manual SAF upload attempt, the READY screen appears.

Wait a moment then retry the upload.

If the problem persists, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The function you have attempted to process ( enter Training mode

or Initialization ) is not available until a SAF upload of the

Air Miles transactions in the SAF log has been processed.

Perform a manual SAF Upload then retry the function.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 237

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

SYSTEM PROBLEM

PLEASE RETRY

SYSTEM PROBLEM

RETRYING

SYSTEM PROBLEM

SECURITY LIMIT

PLEASE RETRY

SYSTEM PROBLEM

SECURITY LIMIT

RETURN TO CLERK

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

One or more of the messages sent between the terminal and the

Moneris Host are missing data or have incorrect data.

Wait for a few minutes then try the transaction again.

If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant Service

Centre for assistance.

The terminal is automatically retrying the transaction.

Please wait until the terminal returns to the READY screen or another message appears.

The terminal limits the number of PINs that can be entered in a specific time frame.

This message appears if the number of PINs entered exceeds that limit. The current transaction is cancelled and debit and

Chip-with-PIN transactions cannot be performed for a period of up to 10 minutes.

After 3 seconds the last line of this message changes to

"RETURN TO CLERK".

- Retrieve the terminal from the cardholder.

- Press the key twice.

- Request an alternate form of payment.

This message appears 3 seconds after the SYSTEM PROBLEM

SECURITY LIMIT PLEASE RETRY

message appears.

- Retrieve the terminal from the cardholder.

- Press the key twice.

- Request an alternate form of payment.

TABLE FULL

TAP FAILED

PLEASE INSERT

OR SWIPE CARD

You have tried to add too many Clerk IDs or Terminal Names.

You can add a maximum of 255 different Clerk IDs and 100 different Terminal Names.

The contactless reader was unable to read a card or (contactless debit only) the card has been tapped for an amount that exceeds its

maximum Contactless Dollar Value . If the card is also a chip

card, insert it into the chip reader. If the card does not have a chip, swipe the card on the terminal.

238 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

TCP CONNECTION

FAILED

TERMINAL DATA

ERROR, CONTACT

SERVICE CENTRE

TERMINAL SETUP

REQUIRED

TIME-OUT

RETURN TO CLERK

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The terminal has tested the Ethernet connection and was unable to establish a connection to the Moneris Host. The terminal will display this message for 3 seconds then return to the previous prompt.

1. Check all the cables to ensure everything is plugged in correctly.

2. Check that the router and hub/ switch (if any) are functioning

(refer to the Moneris IP Readiness Checklist at moneris.com/checklist ), and confirm that your firewall rules have been updated.

3. Confirm that your network is functioning.

- Public Internet: Contact your ISP (Internet service provider) for assistance.

- Corporate WAN: Call your corporate help desk to confirm that the corporate WAN is functioning properly.

4. If the message reappears, contact the Moneris Merchant

Service Centre for assistance.

If the Initialization retry is not successful, contact the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

Press the key to return to the READY screen.

The terminal has not been configured.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance

with configuring the terminal.

The cardholder has taken too long to respond to their prompts.

- Ask the cardholder to return the terminal.

- Press the key.

- The

RETRY TERMINAL TIME-OUT PRESS OK prompt

appears.

TIME-OUT

REMOVE CARD

Transaction amount over maximum

The cardholder has taken too long to respond to their prompts.

- Ask the cardholder to remove their card. The TIME-OUT

RETURN TO CLERK prompt appears.

The transaction amount exceeds the allowable amount for a single transaction using a gift/loyalty card.

If the transaction is a gift Purchase, do a split-tender transaction, or request another gift card or other form of payment.

Transaction Code Invalid The gift/loyalty transaction cannot be voided (possibly because the card used for the transaction has already been deactivated).

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 239

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

TRANSACTION DATA

NOT FOUND

TRANSACTION

NOT ALLOWED

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

-

EMV Transaction Data :

No EMV data could be found. Wait until the terminal returns to the ADMIN FUNCS menu.

The terminal has incorrectly interpreted a Maestro debit card as a credit card.

and

A Maestro debit card with non-debit Service code has been swiped for any non-debit supported transaction type (i.e., a transaction type other than Purchase,

Refund, Purchase-Void or Refund-Void).

or

A Maestro card has been manually entered.

Retry the transaction with a credit card.

240 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

ERROR MESSAGE

TRANSACTION

NOT FOUND

11 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

Purchase Void

;

Refund Void ;

No Original Authorization number was found in the current

Batch that matches the one that was keyed in. Wait until the

ENTER ORIGINAL AUTHORIZATION # entry screen reappears, and then check your criteria, and try again. OR Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Credit Refund Void

:

No Original Authorization number was found in the current

Batch that matches the one that was keyed in. Wait until the

ENTER ORIGINAL AUTHORIZATION # entry screen reappears, and then check your criteria, and try again. OR Press the key to return to the READY screen.

Debit Purchase Void:

No transactions were found that match the criteria you entered during one of the following reports:

-

debit/credit Stored Transactions

or gift/loyalty Stored

Transactions :

Wait until the PRINT DATE OR BATCH? prompt OR the

ENTER CLERK ID entry screen reappears then check your criteria and try again.

-

Pre-Authorization List

:

Wait until the PRE-AUTH LIST menu OR the ENTER CLERK

ID entry screen reappears then check your criteria and try again.

-

Transaction Inquiry

or gift/loyalty Transaction Inquiry :

Wait until the CARD TO SEARCH menu OR the ENTER

CLERK ID entry screen reappears then check your criteria and try again.

OR

Press the key three times to cancel the report and return to the READY screen.

-

SAF Inquiry

:

There are no SAF transactions in the Air Miles log waiting to be uploaded.

OR

No transactions were found that match the Ernex reference number you entered during an

gift/loyalty VOID

. Check the

Ernex reference number on the loyalty/gift receipt and re-enter it to continue the transaction.

OR

No matching transaction was found during a Pre-Auth Advice

.

Check the Sequence number

of the transaction you are trying to find and re-enter it to continue the transaction.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 241

11 Troubleshooting

ERROR MESSAGE

TRANSFER NOT

ALLOWED FOR

THIS CARD

VALID VALUES

ARE FROM 0.06 TO

5.00 SECONDS

VALID VALUES

ARE FROM 1 TO

15 MINUTES

VALID VALUES

ARE FROM 15 TO

999 SECONDS

VALID VALUES

ARE FROM 5 TO

90 SECONDS

VALID VALUES

FROM 0 TO 30%

PRESS OK

ZERO POINTS

AWARDED

PROBLEM & SOLUTION

The card to which you are attempting to transfer a gift balance is not a variable amount gift card. Press the key to return to the READY screen.

The Stabilization Timer

time entered during dial communication configuration is not valid.

Check the number of seconds entered and enter a valid value when the prompt re-appears.

The value for the SAF upload time period was less than 1 or greater than 15.

Check the value and enter a valid value.

The Backlight delay time is not valid.

Check the number of seconds entered and enter a valid value when the prompt re-appears.

The Ethernet time-out or retry time is not valid.

Check the number of seconds entered and enter a valid value when the prompt re-appears.

This message is displayed if the preset Tip percentage

is not in the right range.

Enter a valid value.

No points were awarded for the Air Miles Rewards transaction.

The READY screen appears after 3 seconds.

Check the values that were entered at the ENTER AMOUNT,

ENTER QUANTITY and the BONUS OFFER selected. They may not qualify the transaction for points OR may have been entered incorrectly.

242 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

11.6 Hardware Problems

If terminal does not display an error message but is not functioning correctly, review this list of hardware problems to find suggested solutions.

IMPORTANT: If you are using PUBLIC IP communication, you may need to contact your ISP for assistance before contacting Moneris. Check the Hardware Problem resolution to determine if this is the case.

HARDWARE PROBLEM SOLUTION

The icon appears in the top left corner on the

READY screen.

Note: On other screens, the

icon appears in the top right corner of the display

The battery is almost empty. Printing will slow down, and the green backlight will turn off and can not be turned on again until the terminal is docked on a base

(communications or charge-only).

Note: The terminal must remain within range of the communications base to which it is registered, regardless of which base it is placed on for battery purposes. For example, if the terminal is registered to Comms Base 1 but placed on

Charge-only Base A because of a low battery then Chargeonly Base A must be located within range of Comms Base 1 to allow the terminal to communicate with Comms Base 1.

Battery is not charging

Ensure the or

icon is displayed on the terminal. If the

icon is not displayed while the terminal is

docked on a base ,

confirm that the base's power cable is connected to both the base and a working power outlet.

Card numbers are not masked properly on the

Cardholder copy and/or the

Merchant copy of the receipt

Chip card reader won't read cards

Make sure that

and

Merchant Receipt Card Masking

Pre-Printing

is disabled.

is enabled,

- Try inserting a different card. If this card can be read, the problem is with the first card. Request another form of payment.

- If the card reader still won't read cards, contact the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

Enable the Contactless Reader

parameter. The "TAP CARD" text doesn’t display as part of the card entry prompt

The contactless logo doesn't appear on printed contactless transaction receipts

Enable the Contactless Logo parameter.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 243

11 Troubleshooting

HARDWARE PROBLEM SOLUTION

Display screen is blank

The terminal may be powered off. Power on

the terminal by pressing the key.

If it is already powered on, and the display is still blank, the battery may need to be charged.

Dock the terminal on a

powered base.

If the display screen is still blank, ensure that the power cable is firmly connected to the power port on the base and the wall jack.

If the display is still blank, contact the Moneris Merchant

Service Centre for assistance.

Display lighting is too bright or too dark

The contrast setting is too high or too low.

Check the

contrast setting and increase or decrease it to

work with the lighting at the terminal location.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance. Ethernet communication problems are occurring intermittently.

Magnetic Stripe Card reader won't read cards.

No transactions are being processed. Terminal is using

Dial.

- Try swiping the card more quickly or more slowly or from the front of the reader towards the back.

- Try swiping a different card. If this card can be read, the problem is with the first card. Request another form of payment.

- Use a Head Cleaning Card to clean the card reader (a.k.a. the magnetic stripe reader or MSR). Contact the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre if you need Head Cleaning Cards.

- If the card reader still won't read cards, contact the Moneris

Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

- Determine whether Call Waiting or Call Answer is activated on the phone line that the terminal is using.

- If either one is activated,

configure the dial Prefix on the

terminal as: *70,, (star, seven, zero, comma, comma). Refer to "

Entering alphabetic characters and punctuation ".

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance. Nothing is possible on the terminal after initial communications configuration is completed: not initialization, not transactions

You need to advance receipt paper from the printer.

While the terminal is powered on, press and hold down the

key until the paper advances to the desired length.

Note: If the lid is closed, DO NOT attempt to manually pull the paper from the printer as this will damage the printer.

244 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

HARDWARE PROBLEM SOLUTION

Printer Jam

"CANCELLED" is printed on a gift/loyalty Close Batch report.

Note: If the lid is closed, DO NOT attempt to manually pull the paper from the printer as this will damage the printer.

Open the printer and check that:

- the paper feed is clear.

- the paper roll is seated correctly.

-Close the printer lid and ensure that it is closed completely.

When the problem is fixed, the printer will finish printing the receipt or report that was in progress. If necessary,

reprint the transaction.

Note: Most debit transactions cannot be performed until the printer problem is fixed. (Credit transactions and some debit

chip transactions can be performed manually if necessary.)

If communications are interrupted during the

gift/loyalty

Close Batch

leaving the Close Batch out of balance, the

"CANCELLED” message appears on the terminal screen,

"CANCELLED" is printed on the report, and the batch is

NOT closed.

Contact the Moneris Merchant Service Centre for assistance.

Your gift program is not configured to allow for the printing of the gift card's expiry date on transaction receipts.

The gift card expiry date does not get printed on the transaction receipt even though the card has an expiry rule.

Points balance is negative

One Reward coupon prints although the loyalty card has reached the Reward

Threshold Level multiple times.

Terminal does not respond when a $ amount is entered and the key is pressed.

A negative points balance is possible if you have chosen this option for your loyalty program setup.

For Automatic Redemption, a cardholder may redeem only one Reward Coupon per transaction (a Reward is equal to the Reward Threshold Level).

Inform the cardholder that he/she can receive the remaining

Reward Coupons during subsequent transactions with the same card.

You have attempted to enter $0.00 as the loyalty card total transaction or benefit amount. Re-enter the correct amount.

TOTALS NOT

AVAILABLE is printed on a

Close Batch report.

Zero dollar values on a

gift/loyalty Stored

Transactions report by batch

.

If a Close Batch transaction is sent to the Moneris/Ernex

Host when there are no transactions at the Host, the report prints only a header, footer, and the text "312 -- TOTALS

NOT AVAILABLE."

No Ernex transactions have been performed since the last

gift/loyalty Stored Transactions report

(a.k.a. a gift/loyalty

Batch Totals report) was printed.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 245

11 Troubleshooting

11.7 Understanding DECLINED Messages

A transaction can be declined for a number of reasons. (Decline receipts print in "reverse print.")

Check the table below for the full Declined message and follow the resolution instructions.

If

configured to do so

, the terminal will beep for each of these messages:

RESOLUTION DECLINED

MESSAGE

DECLINED Return the card to the cardholder, and advise them to contact their card issuer.

Request another form of payment.

Retain the card if possible and contact Moneris Merchant

Contact Centre for further instructions.

DECLINED 4x

HOLD CARD -

CALL

DECLINED BY

CARD

PRESS OK

DECLINED BY

CARD

REMOVE CARD

DECLINED

CARD

CANCELLED

DECLINED

CARD NOT SETUP

The chip card has declined the transaction.

- Press the key.

- The DECLINED BY CARD REMOVE CARD message appears.

The chip card has declined the transaction.

- The terminal beeps once per second until the chip card is removed.

- The receipts are printed with DECLINED BY CARD on them.

- Request another form of payment.

The debit transaction has not been approved.

If the problem persists, advise the debit cardholder to contact their branch.

Request another form of payment.

The terminal has not been set up on the Moneris Host to process that card type.

Call the Moneris Merchant Contact Centre for assistance.

Call the Moneris Merchant Contact Centre for assistance. DECLINED

CARD NOT

SUPPORTED

DECLINED

EXCEEDS REFUND

AMT/LIMIT

DECLINED

EXCESS PIN TRIES

The amount of this transaction is greater than your Refund limit.

Provide the cardholder with the amount of the refund using an alternate payment method or contact Moneris Merchant Contact

Centre for a temporary increase.

Contact your Moneris Solutions Sales representative if you wish to increase your limit permanently.

The cardholder has entered their PIN number incorrectly too many times in a row.

Refer the cardholder to their branch, and request another form of payment.

246 Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual

11 Troubleshooting

DECLINED -

RETRY

TRANSACTION?

YES NO

DECLINED

MESSAGE

DECLINED

EXPIRED CARD

DECLINED

HOLD CARD -

CALL

DECLINED

INVALID CARD

DECLINED

PLEASE TRY

AGAIN

REMOVE CARD

DECLINED RE-TRY

EDIT ERROR ###

PRESS OK

RESOLUTION

Examine the Expiry date embossed on the card:

If the date is in the future, retry the transaction.

OR

If the embossed date on the card is in the past, return the card to the cardholder, and advise them to contact their card issuer for renewal.

Retain the card if possible and call the Moneris Merchant

Contact Centre for further instructions.

A debit card has been swiped, and the terminal does not process debit transactions.

Return the card to the cardholder and request another form of payment.

A chip transaction could not be completed because it was declined by the Host.

Remove the card, and retry the transaction.

The transaction was not completed.

Press the key or wait 3 seconds for the READY screen to reappear then try the transaction again.

A non-chip transaction could not be completed because it was declined by the Host.

Try again by pressing the key, or return to the READY screen by pressing the key.

Moneris iWL220 Short-Range Mobile Operating Manual 247

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents